You are on page 1of 267

VERSIO N 6.1/2

Minerals Library Consumer Objects


800xA – AC800M Connect - Minerals
Library

PREPARED STATUS SECURITY LEVEL

2021-10-14 N.Carvalho Approved Public


APPROVED DOCUMENT KIND

2021-11-23 G.Schuetz Manual


OWNING ORGANIZATION DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

IAPI ABB Switzerland 3BHS161557-612 C en 1/267


© Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved.
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Contents
1. Summary ......................................................................................................................................5

2. Common data ..............................................................................................................................5


2.1. Basic description ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.2. Control ........................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1. Library location.......................................................................................................... 6
2.2.2. Point of Control ......................................................................................................... 6
2.2.3. Auto Mode .................................................................................................................. 8
2.2.4. Maintenance Mode.................................................................................................... 9
2.2.5. Simulation Mode ....................................................................................................... 9
2.2.6. Parameter Error ......................................................................................................... 9
2.3. Operation.....................................................................................................................................10
2.3.1. Graphic Element Drive ............................................................................................ 12
2.3.2. Graphic Element DriveCtrl...................................................................................... 16
2.3.3. GraphicElement DriveFBTxt................................................................................... 19
2.3.4. Graphic Element DriveMCValue ........................................................................... 20
2.3.5. Graphic Element Process Symbols ....................................................................... 21
2.4. Alarm & Event list .......................................................................................................................22
2.5. PCC Viewer (Process Control Connection) .......................................................................... 25
2.5.1. Viewer Basic Description ....................................................................................... 25
2.5.2. Viewer Detail Description...................................................................................... 25
2.5.3. Viewer Example ........................................................................................................27
2.5.4. Error indication and Diagnostics..........................................................................27

3. MOT1 ......................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1. Basic description ...................................................................................................................... 29
3.2. Control ......................................................................................................................................... 29
3.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation..................................................................... 29
3.2.2. Parameter description ........................................................................................... 30
3.2.3. Data Type description............................................................................................ 34
3.2.4. Project Constants ................................................................................................... 39
3.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.1. Graphic Elements .................................................................................................... 40
3.3.2. Faceplate ....................................................................................................................41
3.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission ...............................................................................51
3.3.4. Alarm & Event List ................................................................................................... 52

4. MOT1_VVVF .............................................................................................................................. 55
4.1. Basic description ...................................................................................................................... 55
4.2. Control ......................................................................................................................................... 56
4.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation..................................................................... 56
4.2.2. Parameter description ........................................................................................... 56
4.2.3. Data Type description............................................................................................ 62
4.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRef LCC ................................................................................. 68
4.2.5. Project Constants ................................................................................................... 69
4.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................... 70
4.3.1. Graphic Elements .................................................................................................... 70
4.3.2. Faceplate ................................................................................................................... 70

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 2/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3. Normal View ............................................................................................................. 73


4.3.4. Faceplate Control Permission .............................................................................. 84
4.4. Definition of Speed Supervision (FB3)................................................................................. 87
4.4.1. Available Parameters .............................................................................................. 88
4.4.2. Run Speed Supervision .......................................................................................... 89
4.4.3. Off Speed Supervision ........................................................................................... 90
4.4.4. Alarm & Event List ................................................................................................... 92
4.5. Application Examples............................................................................................................... 94
4.5.1. Weighfeeder closed loop control......................................................................... 94

5. MOT2 ......................................................................................................................................... 98
5.1. Basic description ...................................................................................................................... 98
5.2. Control ......................................................................................................................................... 98
5.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation..................................................................... 98
5.2.2. Parameter description ........................................................................................... 99
5.2.3. Data Type description.......................................................................................... 105
5.2.4. Project Constants ................................................................................................. 109
5.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................. 109
5.3.1. Graphic elements .................................................................................................. 109
5.3.2. Faceplate ................................................................................................................. 109

117
5.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission ............................................................................. 119
5.3.4. Alarm & Event List .................................................................................................. 119

6. MOT2_VVVF ............................................................................................................................. 123


6.1. Basic description .....................................................................................................................123
6.2. Control ....................................................................................................................................... 124
6.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation................................................................... 124
6.2.2. Parameter Description......................................................................................... 124
6.2.3. Data Type description........................................................................................... 131
6.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRefX / SPExtRefY LCC ..................................................... 138
6.2.5. Project Constants ................................................................................................. 139
6.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................. 140
6.3.1. Graphic Elements .................................................................................................. 140
6.3.2. Faceplate .................................................................................................................. 141
6.4. Speed Feedback Supervision (FB3) .................................................................................... 156
6.4.2. Faceplate Control Permission ............................................................................ 158
6.4.3. Alarm & Event List ................................................................................................. 160

7. MOTP ........................................................................................................................................164
7.1. Basic description .................................................................................................................... 164
7.2. Control ....................................................................................................................................... 164
7.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation................................................................... 164
7.2.2. Parameter description ......................................................................................... 165
7.2.3. Data Type description........................................................................................... 172
7.2.4. Project Constants .................................................................................................. 176
7.2.5. Behavior with E1Ref LCC ....................................................................................... 178
7.3. Operation................................................................................................................................... 178
7.3.1. Graphic elements ................................................................................................... 178
7.3.2. Faceplate .................................................................................................................. 178
7.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission .............................................................................192
7.3.4. Alarm & Event List ..................................................................................................193
7.4. Application Examples............................................................................................................. 196

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 3/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.4.1. Damper close on stopped Fan ........................................................................... 196


7.4.2. Y1Step on Group Restart only ............................................................................ 196
7.4.3. Fan Damper position control loop ..................................................................... 197

8. VLV1 ..........................................................................................................................................199
8.1. Basic description .................................................................................................................... 199
8.2. Control ....................................................................................................................................... 199
8.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation................................................................... 199
8.2.2. Parameter description .........................................................................................200
8.2.3. Data Type description.......................................................................................... 203
8.2.4. Project Constants ................................................................................................. 207
8.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................. 208
8.3.1. Graphic elements .................................................................................................. 208
8.3.2. Faceplate ................................................................................................................. 208
8.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission ............................................................................ 214
8.3.4. Alarm & Event List ..................................................................................................216
8.4. Application Example................................................................................................................ 217
8.4.1. OutOfService Mode example for a Valve........................................................... 217

9. VLVNO1 .................................................................................................................................... 219


9.1. Basic description .....................................................................................................................219
9.2. Control ........................................................................................................................................219
9.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation....................................................................219
9.2.2. Parameter description ......................................................................................... 220
9.2.3. Data Type description.......................................................................................... 223
9.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................. 226
9.3.1. Graphic elements .................................................................................................. 226
9.3.2. Faceplate ................................................................................................................. 227
9.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission ............................................................................ 233
9.3.4. Alarm & Event List ................................................................................................. 234

10. Actuator ...................................................................................................................................236


10.1. Basic description .................................................................................................................... 236
10.2. Control ................................................................................................................................... 236
10.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation................................................................... 236
10.2.2. Parameter description ......................................................................................... 237
10.2.3. Data Type description.......................................................................................... 243
10.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRef LCC ............................................................................... 247
10.2.5. Project Constants ................................................................................................. 247
10.3. Operation.................................................................................................................................. 248
10.3.1. Graphic elements .................................................................................................. 248
10.3.2. Faceplate ................................................................................................................. 248
10.3.3. Faceplate Permissions ......................................................................................... 262
10.3.4. Alarm & Event List ................................................................................................. 263
10.4. Application Example............................................................................................................... 265
10.4.1. Control Valve closed loop control ...................................................................... 265

11. Revisions..................................................................................................................................267

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 4/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

1. Summary
This document contains a detailed description of the following Consumer Objects:

– MOT1

– MOT1_VVVF

– MOT2

– MOT2_VVVF

– MOTP

– VLV1

– VLVNO1

– Actuator

Consumer objects provide access and control for the physical devices (consumers) in the
plant. Consumer objects are normally used in combination with:

– Group (Group, GrpCycleCtrl, DriveGroup)

– Preselection Binary (Prebin)

– Start Warning (STW).

2. Common data

2.1. Basic description


All consumer objects have the following common basic functions:

– Remote Modes

• Sequence – object controlled by group or sequence


• Central – object controlled from faceplate or from Process Panel
• Auto – object controlled by the process (level, time, temperature, positioning, etc.)

– Local Modes

• Local – object controlled from field with all/most interlocks


• Local Maintenance – object controlled from field with reduced interlocks
• Definition of matrix between local modes and active interlocks can be customized per
project
• Local mode selection can be from field and/or from faceplate

– Interlocks / Process Control Connection (PCC)

• Safety (run or start inhibit) (IC)


• Equipment (run or start inhibit) (IB)
• Process (run, start inhibit or auto start) (IA)
• Previous Drive in Sequence (PD)
• Unlimited number of interlock signals thru PCC
• Parameterized interlocks / cause and effect
• Interlock status viewer

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 5/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– Sequencing / Group Control Connection (GCC)

• Predefined interface between consumer objects and group objects


• Parameterized start / stop / quick stop / routing and change over
• Parameterized Selectors (Duty Standby, Routing etc) and Out of Service
• Summary status of consumers (e.g. run / ready / fault / warning / local / time to start
/ time to stop) forwarded to group faceplate

– Alarm Handling / Forwarding and Automatic Disabling of Alarms via PCC

• Advanced alarm disabling and acknowledgement, depending on operation conditions

– Group active or stopped


– Consumer active or stopped
– Consumer remote or local

• First fault alarm detection for object an all connected interlock signals
• Selectable start up alarm inhibit, for dynamic process signals
• Automatic forwarding of alarm and pre warning from signals to consumers
• Navigation by object links between consumer and interlock signal faceplates
• Dynamic alarm priority control

– Electrical Interface - Alarms

• 3 static alarm signals (availability, overload, trip, emergency stop, etc)


• up to 4 dynamic alarm signals (run x/y feedback, position limit switches, speed switch,
etc.)
• 1 Control voltage supervision signal
• 4 IO board status supervision signals
• up to 5 field control signals (start x/y, stop, set local, set remote)

– Current / Power indication and alarming

• Absolute current or power


• Relative current or power in relation to the motor’s nominal

– Over current pre-warning

– others

• Number of start and run time counter


• Tracking of mode, status, blocking and stop reason
• Built-In simulation for testing and operator training
• Connection to start warning control function

2.2. Control
2.2.1. Library location
The Control Module Types for consumer are located in the library BMIStandard for Control
Builder M Professional. The corresponding DataTypes are located in BMIConstAndVar.

2.2.2. Point of Control


Consumer objects have 4 different Point of Control POC:

– SEQuence

– CENtral

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 6/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO N S U M E R O B J EC TS

– LOCal

– Out of Service.

The point of control defines the source, location from where the object will be controlled, e.g.
from the central control room, by starting each consumer separately (CEN) or from the field
(LOC).

In order to control an object from a certain POC, the POC must be selected before giving
command to the object. Usually the selection of the POC takes place from the HMI, but the
library allows as well changing the POC from the Local Control Box or from the application
software.

Depending on general library configuration stopping/closing an object from the Faceplate or


Local is possible disregarding the POC.

The different POC modes:

Sequence:

The object is controlled from a superior application program e.g. from a drive group se-
quence. Sequence mode can be set from the operator station or by the application program.

Central:

The object is controlled from the operator station by means of the start/stop or open/close
push buttons on the faceplate. Depending on configuration the consumer object can as well
be started from the group or from an application thru a sequence start, in this case the mode
change is done automatically. Central mode can be set from the operator station only.

Local:

The object is controlled from the field via start/stop or open/close push buttons. The IB, IA
and PD interlocks are de-activated in this POC. The safety interlock IC remains active.

Further the two functional back signals (FB1 and FB2) are also de-activated while pressing
and holding the start/open push button.

Using the project constants DisableIAPDInLoc (default = true), DisableIBInLoc (default = true)
the default interlock behaviour in local can be modified to fit the Project Operation Concept.

Local mode can be set from the operator station or from the field

If the superior application program (e.g. Group) sets the local permission to true,
the local start push button can switch the object to local mode and the object will
start up/open, with reduced interlock protection as configured for Local Mode.

– Alarming is disabled when object is in Local mode (no alarm acknowledge on the operator
station necessary when object is operated from the field)

Out of Service:

The object is not in service and cannot be started from any location. It also means that the
object will be skipped when running a superior group sequence.

Out of Service mode can be set and re-set from the operator station only.

Forced Run (Forced Open for VLV1 and Forced Close for VLVNO1):

This State is in addition to the 4 POC, in case the Object’s FeedBackRun signal is true without
any command issued from the Control Module. This removes the possibility to control the

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 7/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Object, therefore until this external “FeedBackRun signal’ is removed, the Object is blocked,
and no operation can be done. MCC Alarms (M1…M4) will be ignored and a Contactor Force
Alarm is issued.

2.2.3. Auto Mode


Consumer Objects (with exception of MOTP and Actuator) can have an additional Auto Mode
enabled per Object which allows to select between two different Object behaviours from the
Operator Station or the program:

Man (default):

Object is controlled by start / stop commands either issued from the operator station or
from the superior application program.

Auto:

Object is controlled via input IA and/or PCC Auto Start (IA =1 and PCC Auto Start Condition
starts the motor, IA=0 or PCC IA_Process stops the motor). Typical use of the auto mode is
on/off control via thermostats, sump level switches, etc.

Mode Auto is only possible in POC Sequence or Central, and the Object is by default changing
back to Mode Manual if an Interlock or Trip condition occurs or the Object receives a Stop
command.

Reference Table, possible commands per POC for Consumer Object with Auto mode

POC/Mode Sequence Sequence Central Man Central Auto Local


Command Man Auto

Program Start/Open Set Auto Set Seq Auto2

Program Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close 1 Stop/Close 1 Stop/Close


& set Man & set Man

Program Quick Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close


Stop/Close & set Man & set Man

IA = true or PCC Auto Start Start/Open Start/Open

IA = false Interlock Stop/Close Interlock Stop/Close


Stop/Close3 Stop/Close3

Operator Start/Open Start/Open


1 1
Operator Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close Stop/Close1
& set Man & set Man

Local Start/Open Start/Open

Local Stop/Close Trip/Close Trip/Close Trip/Close Trip/Close Stop/Close


& set Man & set Man

1-depends on EnFPLStopInAllModes setting (Control Module Parameter)

2 Group can be configured to halt on objects that are not in Sequence Mode setting the SetSeqMode
Parameter to 2

3 AutoMode Parameter allows to disable the IA Interlock to stop the Consumer in Manual Mode

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 8/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2.2.4. Maintenance Mode


An additional mode Maintenance can be available if configured in the Project. In maintenance
mode all interlocks IA and IB will be disabled independent of the configuration in POC Local,
and additionally it is possible to disable IC with the Project Constant DisableICInMaint (de-
fault = false).

This Mode is by default restricted to POC Local and is used to allow maintenance works on
the equipment.

Mode Maintenance can be set from the Field or via the faceplate.

2.2.5. Simulation Mode


The group object has the possibility to bet set in simulation mode from the operator station.
In this case, all the consumer and basic objects belonging to it will be forced to simulation
mode as well.

In simulation mode, feedbacks (run, open, close) and Input Signals (e.g. MC Current Input to
0.8 of the configured High Limit) are simulated and commands and alarms are disabled.

This mode is used to test Group Sequence logic and Interlocks. Additionally, testing the MCC
Signals can still be done per Object by setting the “Allow Alarm In Simulation” check box from
the faceplate maintenance tab.

Basic objects such as AIS, AIC, DIS, DIC will be blocked and set to a normal value.

In case of the group or any consumer object is set to simulation mode there is still possibility
that digital/analog output signals can be activated.

For safety always disconnect the Profibus, modulebus or any other interface to the field.

2.2.6. Parameter Error


Elements and Faceplates do show Parameter Error if Control Module Parameters on the Block
or a connected Block are invalid. This Indication means that the Application Program needs to
be corrected.

Figure 1 - Example of Parameter Error Indication in Graphics

Not all Graphic Elements indicate Parameter Error and not all Parameters are vali-
dated for proper Range and Value. Testing is required to validate a new Application
Program; no indication of Parameter Error does not mean the Function works as in-
tended

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 9/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

There are different reasons for Parameter Error in Consumer Objects as follows:

Error Resolution

Wrong Value on PreSelection The string on any of the PreSelection Parameters of the Control
Parameter Modules cannot be parsed.
This Error is as well shown in the Point of Control Tab in Faceplate,
indicating which Parameter needs to be corrected.

Wrong Value for PCC IntlkType or If any connected Signal (AIS, DIS…) has Parameter Error because of
IntlkDir Parameter on a connected wrong PCC Parameters, this Error is forwarded to connected
Signal Consumers and indicated as Parameter Error as well.
Resolve the Parameter Error on all connected Signals.

Error Status on AlarmCond Block Verify the Status Value of the AlarmCond Blocks is bigger or equal 0,
if any Error (Status < 0) is reported, refer to Control Builder Help
(Status and Error Messages – Alarm and Event) for Details.
Common Errors are invalid characters or duplicates in Name
parameter fo the Control Module, invalid value on Class parameter

2.3. Operation
There are different graphic elements available for consumer objects. The most valuable
Graphical Element on the Consumer Objects is the Drive Element, which is available on all
Consumer Objects. Note that the names of these aspects are not “DriveXXX” but are equal to
the names of the respective Consumer Objects.

Graphic Element Description Example

Drive Object status, control point, mode and alarm infor-


mation as symbol.
On all Consumer Objects.

DriveCtrl Displays object control information. Allows direct entry


of set-point.
Only for MOT1_VVVF and MOTP.

DriveFBTxt Object feedback signal information as text.


On all Consumer Objects.

DriveMCValue Displays the actual motor current.


Only for MOT1, MOT2 and MOT1_VVVF.
In addition, there are animated Process Symbols available for all consumers except Actuator.
These are selected Graphic Elements out of the Process Symbols, connected to the object’s
StatusRun

Graphic Element StatusRun Indication Example

AirSlide Changing Color

Arrow Changing Color

BeltConveyor Changing Color

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 10/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

BucketElevator Changing Color

EP Changing Color

GenericPE Changing Color

MillHorizontal Changing Color

Pipe Bow Changing Color

ProcessElement Changing Color

Pump Changing Color

ScrewConveyor Changing Color

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 11/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2.3.1. Graphic Element Drive


The most valuable graphical element on the consumer objects is the Drive element, which is
available on all consumer objects. Note that the name of this aspect is not “Drive” but is
equal to the name of the respective consumer object.

2.3.1.1. Presentation

IndicationType Off / PosY Run / PosX

S1_Triangle

S1_Lollipop

S1_Diamond

S1_Rectangle

S1_Arrow

S1_OpenArrow

S1_StealthArrow

S1_Oval

S1_Line

S1_TiltTriangle

C1_MotM

C1_Pump

C1_Fan

C1_RotaryFeeder

C1_GearWheelPump

C1_Valve

C1_ManValve

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 12/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

C1_AutoValve

C1_Generator

C1_Heater

C1_BucketElev

C1_Conveyor

C1_EP

C1_AirSlideOutlet

The line and the fill color can be changed individually for status on and off (PosX and PosY).
Refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration (3BHF004109) for a detailed descrip-
tion of status colors.

E99_TagName is only visible when the corresponding general property (EnableTagName) is


set to true (refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration (3BHF004109)). In case of
alarm or warning the background, color changes from transparent to the corresponding
alarm treatment color.

With the property MirrorPosition it is possible to change / switch the indicated position. This
is only available on IndicationTypes indicating a position (like Valve, Damper, Diverter, et
cetera).

IndicationType Original Position Mirror Position

C2_Diverter

C2_LouvreDamper

C2_AirSlide

C2_PropRoller

C2_Damper

C2_AirSlideShut

C2_LouvreDamperInv

C2_PropRollerInv

C2_DamperInv

C2_AirSlideInv

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 13/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

C2_ValveLevelInd

C2_ValveManLevelInd

C2_ValveAutoLevelInd

C3_Diverter

C3_3WayValve

2.3.1.2. Status

Examples Object status Symbol color

OFF, object ready to operate grey

OFF, object not ready to operate due to an grey, black cross with red back-
interlock ground

OFF, object not ready to operate due to an grey, filled red frame
interlock object alarm (e.g. availability or
contactor feedback)

RUN green

RUN with warning (e.g. from PCC signals) filled green, filled orange frame

RUN with warning (e.g. High Current) green, filled red frame

2.3.1.3. Labels

Description Example

Point of Control Sequence

Point of Control Central

Point of Control Local

Local Maintenance

Out of Service

Forced Run
(Run without command)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 14/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Auto Mode

Manual Mode

External setpoint and Auto Mode

External setpoint and Manual Mode

Balancing Mode.

Position Indication

Run Direction Indication

Operator Note

Blocked Interlock or Functional Back Signal

Example

Properties

Name DataType Default Val Description

DirIndicationType Integer 1 0 = Run indication, 1 = Position indication

DirXOrientation Integer 0 Set arrow orientation clockwise 0 - 360 °

DirXPosition Integer 3 Position: 1 = Top left, 2 = Top center, 3 = Top right, 4 = Cen-
ter left, 5 = Center center, 6 = Center right, 7 = Bottom left,
8 = Bottom center, 9 = Bottom right

DirYOrientation Integer 180 Set arrow orientation clockwise 0 - 360 °

DirYPosition Integer 9 Position: 1 = Top left, 2 = Top center, 3 = Top right, 4 = Cen-
ter left, 5 = Center center, 6 = Center right, 7 = Bottom left,
8 = Bottom center, 9 = Bottom right

EnableDirX Boolean True Enable = True

EnableDirY Boolean True Enable = True

EnableMode-Auto- Boolean True Show mode auto label when auto mode is active
Label

IndicationType Enum B11_Damper Symbol type selection

MirrorPosition Boolean False Invert position indication

Orientation Integer 0 Obsolete property used for migration only, Symbol's Ori-
entation in degrees, clockwise.

ShowTagPos Integer 8 Position: 1 = Top left, 2 = Top center, 3 = Top right, 4 = Cen-
ter left, 5 = Center center, 6 = Center right, 7 = Bottom left,
8 = Bottom center, 9 = Bottom right

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 15/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

SubscriptionRate Integer 0 The update rate for all aspect object properties sub-
scribed for

SymbolSize Integer 16 Symbol size in pixel: 8 = Litle, 12 = Small, 16 = Standard, 20


= Large, 24 = XXL

TagNameCount Integer 0 Number of character

TagNameIndex Integer 0 Start point


Note that certain properties are not available for all consumer objects.

For common settings please refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration
(3BHF004109).

2.3.2. Graphic Element DriveCtrl


Displays object control information. Allows direct entry of set-point

2.3.2.1. Presentation

To change the DriveCtrl presentation in common, change the Common NG Properties as de-
scribed in MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration (3BHF004109). However, it is possi-
ble to change the settings per graphic item individual: Set the Customize property value to
true, to enable the Customize properties. If Customize is false, the Customize properties (En-
ableDescription, EnableStatus, EnableTagName, EnableValue#Ind) have no impact on the
graphic item.
Tag Name
Status
Value 1
Value 2

Description

Figure 2 - DriveCtrl Customization

Customization Examples

Settings Example

EnableDescription = False
EnableStatus = False
EnableValue1Ind = True
EnableValue2Ind = True

EnableDescription = True
EnableStatus = False
EnableValue1Ind = True
EnableValue2Ind = True

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 16/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

EnableDescription = False
EnableStatus = True
EnableValue1Ind = True
EnableValue2Ind = True

EnableDescription = True
EnableStatus = True
EnableValue1Ind = True
EnableValue2Ind = True

2.3.2.2. Labels

Labels Example

Operation Modes e.g. Set Point External

Signal Error – Signal Quality

Deviation High / Low

Measured value signal Blocked / Forced

Measured Value Limit Alarms

2.3.2.3. Properties

Name DataType Default Val Description

Customize Boolean False False = General settings are used. True = Customized set-
tings are used.

EnableDescription Boolean True Show value description, property Customize must be true

EnableFitTo-Best- Boolean True Set best PID size


Size

EnableLimitLabel Boolean True Show limit labels

EnableStatus Boolean True Show status bar, property Customize must be true

EnableTagName Boolean True Show tag name, property Customize must be true

EnableUnit Boolean True Show units

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 17/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

EnableValue1Ind Boolean True Enable Value1, property Customize must be true

EnableValue2Ind Boolean True Enable Value2, property Customize must be true

NumberOfDigits Integer 4 Number of presented digits

SubscriptionRate Integer 0 The update rate for all aspect object properties sub-
scribed for

UnitSize Integer 8 Unit size in pixel: 7 = Small, 8 = Standard, 10 = Large, 12=


XXL

Value1Indication Integer 0 0 = Measured Value, 1 = Set Point

Value2Indication Integer 4 0 = Measured Value, 1 = Set Point

ValueSize Integer 12 Value size in pixel: 8 = Small, 10 Medium, 12 = Standard, 14


= Large, 16 = XXL
Note that certain properties are not available for all consumer objects.

For common settings please refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration
(3BHF004109).

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 18/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2.3.3. GraphicElement DriveFBTxt


This Element shows the FB1 and FB2 error. Normally, TextSource is set to 2 to have the same
text as in the faceplate. In this case, all TextIndTr String properties are discarded.

2.3.3.1. Presentation

2.3.3.2. Status

Example Object status Symbol color

Normal Position Teal dimmed

Abnormal Position without Alarm Indication Gray back with Red Text

Abnormal Position with Alarm Indication Red frame around the Text

2.3.3.3. Labels

Description Indication

Status blocked

Example:

2.3.3.3.1. Properties

Name DataType Default Val Description

AppearanceType Integer 0 0 = Alarm, 2 = Value, 10 = Alarm interlock, 12 = Value


interlock

ColorAbnormalPos Color Lime Symbols color in Abnormal/Alarm Position. Only ap-


plied if EnableLogicalColor is set to false.

ColorNormalPos Color RGB(159,159,159) Symbols color in Normal Position. Only applied if


EnableLogicalColor is set to false.

EnableFont Boolean False True enables the Font property. If false, default
Font is used and TextSize as well as TextBold are
enabled.

EnableLogicalColor Boolean True If EnableLogicalColor is true, then all used colors


are logical colors. The logical color reference is
equal to the default logical color used in the color
properties. To use an individual color set it to false.

EnableNormalPos Boolean True Hide symbol in normal position

Font Font Font( "Arial" ,10 Text font when EnableFont is true
,Regular, Bold)

IndicationType Integer 0 0 = Text with background color, 10 = Square in front


of text, 20 = Text colored

IndicationValue Integer 1 0 = All, 1 = FB1, 2 = FB2

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 19/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

NormalPos Boolean True Value normal position used for AppearanceType 2 =


Value

SubscriptionRate Integer 0 The update rate for all aspect object properties
subscribed for

SymbolSize Integer 12 Symbol size in pixel: 8 = Little, 10 = Small, 12 =


Standard, 16 = Large, 20 = XXL

TextBold Boolean True Switch Text Style between normal and bold, only
available if EnableFont is set to false

TextIndTrFB1Abnor- String "FB1" TextIndTrFB1AbnormalPos used if TextSource = 1


malPos

TextIndTrFB1Normal- String "FB1" TextIndTrFB1NormalPos used if TextSource = 1


Pos

TextIndTrFB2Abnor- String "FB2" TextIndTrFB2AbnormalPos used if TextSource = 1


malPos

TextIndTrFB2Normal- String "FB2" TextIndTrFB2NormalPos used if TextSource = 1


Pos

TextSize Integer 10 Text size in pixel: 8 = Small, 10 = Standard, 12 =


Large, 16 = XXL. Only available if EnableFont is set
to false.

TextSource Integer 2 0 = None, 1 = TextIndAbnormalPos / TextIndNor-


malPos Properties, 2 = TextOPC
Note that certain properties are not available for all consumer objects.

For common settings please refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration
(3BHF004109).

2.3.4. Graphic Element DriveMCValue

2.3.4.1. Presentation

2.3.4.2. Labels

Description Indication

Status blocked / Forced

Example:

2.3.4.3. Properties

Name DataType Default Value Description

EnableDisplay-Back- Boolean False Show display background color as symbol back-


groundColor ground

EnableUnit Boolean True Show unit

NumberOfDigits Integer 4 Number of presented digits

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 20/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

SubscriptionRate Integer 0 The update rate for all aspect object properties sub-
scribed for

UnitSize Integer 8 Unit size in pixel: 7 = Small, 8 = Standard, 10 = Large,


12= XXL

ValueSize Integer 12 Value size in pixel: 8 = Small, 10 Medium, 12 = Stand-


ard, 14 = Large, 16 = XXL
Note that certain properties are not available for all consumer objects. For common settings
please refer to MinLib Overview Getting Started Configuration (3BHF004109).

2.3.5. Graphic Element Process Symbols


These are selected Graphic Elements out of the Process Symbols, connected to the object’s
StatusRun. They are available on all consumers.

2.3.5.1. Presentation

Note that the default behavior is to change the Color between BMIngFillColor and BMIngFill-
ColorRun, this can be disabled by setting EnableRunColor to false.

Graphic Element StatusRun Indication Example

AirSlide Changing Color

Arrow Changing Color

BeltConveyor Changing Color

BucketElevator Changing Color

EP Changing Color

GenericPE Changing Color

MillHorizontal Changing Color

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 21/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Pipe Bow Changing Color

ProcessElement Changing Color

Pump Changing Color

ScrewConveyor Changing Color

2.3.5.2. Common Properties

Name DataType Default Val Description

AlphaLogicalColor Integer 255 Logical color transparency. Integer between 0 - 255, 0


= full transparent, 255 opaque

EnableLogicalColor Boolean True If EnableLogicalColor is true, then all used colors are
logical colors. To use an individual color set it to false.

EnableRunColor Boolean True If false, FillColorRun is not applied even if StatusRun is


true.

FillColor Brush BMIngFillColor Fill color or background color. Only applied if Ena-
bleLogicalColor is set to false.

FillColorRun Brush BMIngFillCol- Fill color when StatusRun is true. Only applied if Ena-
orRun bleLogicalColor is set to false.

SymbolSize Integer 12 8 = Little, 12 = Small, 16 = Standard, 20 = Large, 24 =


XXL
For detailed descriptions of additional properties, see the Minerals GraphiXs User Guide
3BHF004110.

2.4. Alarm & Event list


All consumer objects in the Minerals library are able to provide a list of alarms and events.

The alarm and event list are a powerful tool for diagnosing the reason of a failure or a bad op-
eration during any phase of the project. Some of these messages are disabled when in simu-
lation mode.

Whenever a new event or alarm happens, a new message is created in the event list. Actions
such as POC change, mode change (auto/man), out of service selection, start/stop the mo-
tor, will trigger a new event log. Also, alarms are shown in the event list.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 22/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 3 - Alarm and Event List Buttons

The red button opens the alarm list and the green button opens the event list. In the event list
it is also possible to see alarms. The difference between the event and alarm list is that in the
event list, the history of all Events and Alarms is shown, while the Alarm List only shows the
currently active Alarms.

– Notice that the list you open from the faceplate will show only the alarms and events of
that object.

As an example, the following events happened in the motor M_09C_03_NLS: In this case the
object is a MOT1.

Figure 4 - MOT1 Event List

– Motor started running in central mode (from faceplate).

– Motor stopped due to IB1 interlock.

– IB1 interlock was blocked in the faceplate.

– Motor started run with IB1 blocked 7 seconds later

– Motor stopped due to IB2 interlock.

– IB2 interlock was also blocked.

– The motor started run with IB1 and IB2 blocked.

– The motor was stopped from the faceplate (CSP).

As a second example, the following events happened for a MOT1VVVF:

Figure 5 - MOT1VVVF Event List

– Motor started running in sequence mode from the Group or IO.In.SeqStart.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 23/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– During motor running, the Setpoint mode was changed from External to Internal

– Motor stopped due to IO.In.SeqStop (SSP)

– While motor stopped, IB1 block was selected

– While motor stopped, PD block was selected

Notice that the structure of the message changed for this object, as there is an additional
field to show the set point mode, SPInt or SPExt.

For the alarm list, as a difference to the event list, only the active alarms are shown. This
means if no alarm conditions are present, the list will be blank. Below shown is an alarm con-
dition “Overtemperature Failure” that appeared in the motor M_09C_03:

Figure 6 -MOT1 Alarm List

The severity of the alarm can be changed thru AlarmTr parameter in Control Builder for all ob-
jects. This Option is similar to the AlarmTr/LimTr for the Analog/Digital input and output ob-
jects. The following Values are possible for the alarm treatment:

– 3 (default): Unacknowledged alarm “Failure”

– 2: Unacknowledged alarm “Warning”

– 1: Auto Acknowledged Alarm “Warning”

– 0: Event

– -1: no Alarm / Event generated

• Notice that alarms are created only in the following cases:

– Motor running or starting in case of MOT1, MOT2, MOTP and MOT1VVVF


– Valve open in case of VLV1
– Valve closed in case of VLVNO1

• Interlocks are not Alarms. The motor or the valve will not create a message in the alarm
list when a new interlock comes up. The process condition (e.g.: high temperature, low
pressure) that created the interlock is what must create an alarm message in the gen-
eral alarm list of the operator workplace.

– The meaning of each symbol in the Alarm & Event list and the possible combina-
tions can be checked in this manual in the Alarm & Event List section of each object.

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages, a suffix will be added to the Alarm
Text that gives the priority for the Alarm as defined by the AlarmTr.

Suffix Text Constant Standard Text

cBMI.AE.ALP1_SubTxt Warning

cBMI.AE.ALP2_SubTxt Warning

cBMI.AE.ALP3_SubTxt Failure
Note that these Texts are defined in the NLS Resource Manager as well.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 24/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2.5. PCC Viewer (Process Control Connection)


The PCC Viewer is available on all consumer objects. It presents a list of all interlock condi-
tions of one consumer.

2.5.1. Viewer Basic Description


– Categorized view of all connected interlocks by type

• The Interlock Conditions are grouped into the releve

– Actual status of interlock condition

– Indication of disabled interlocks and forced/blocked signals

– Signals connected via PCC bus but without any interlock definition are categorized as un-
assigned. These Signals will be indicated on the Graphics but have no influence on Opera-
tion.

Several Viewer options are provided:

– Show only enabled interlocks

• Show or hide the interlock conditions that are either currently masked by the applica-
tion program, or disabled in the Signal Function, and therefore don’t apply to the con-
sumer currently.

– Show only active interlocks

• Show or hide all interlock conditions that are not active.

– Show only selected direction

• Show or hide the interlock conditions that are valid for the other Direction (X or Y) that
is currently not running or selected.

– Show direction options

• Shows all PCC Direction Options in the Direction Column. By default, only the Direction
X or Y and the FB (Run Feedback delay) option are shown. Refer to the PCC Description
in the Minerals Library Basic Objects for a Description of the options.

2.5.2. Viewer Detail Description

Figure 7 - PCC Viewer

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 25/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Column Description

Name Object name of the interlock condition source. This can be:
Digital or Analog Input Signal
Calculated Digital or Analog Input
PCC_Threshold condition with sub conditions marked (1), (2), etc.
sub condition can be just a name or again any object or control module name
PID loop controller
Consumer object itself in case classic binary IO.In.IC, IB, IA and PD interface is used
Clicking on the name opens the Faceplate or Aspect Context Menu if available.
For binary Interlocks, this requires the Interlock Text to start with the Tagname of the signal
that shall be referenced.

Description Object description of the interlock condition. This can be:


DIS / DIC: <Signal Description> - <AE Text> - <Interlock Limit> (Warning or Alarm)
AIS / AIC: <Signal Description> - <Interlock Limit> (H2, H1, PHi, PLo, L1, L2, ROC)
PIDCtrl: same as AIS with additional Interlock Limit DevH, DevL
Consumer object itself: <InterlockName> (IC, IB#, IA, PD) - <Interlock Text>-
PCC_Threshold_AND3: <Description> - (n out of m)
Sub Condition (n): <Object Description> - <SubTextCond>

Direction The direction of the Interlock, i.e. Dir X or Dir Y. For two-direction consumers e.g. MOT2 to de-
fine the direction the interlock condition is active for. This Field also shows the additional PCC
options, and “FB” is indicated here in case this condition is required for the Consumer to reach
the run state.

Status A Description of the state of the interlock condition:


Active: the interlock is active and stopping the Consumer depending on the POC Configuration
Inhibited: the Consumer is not running or not finished starting, disabling the interlock condi-
tion
Disabled: the interlock condition is disabled, e.g. the corresponding AIS Limit is not enabled.
Masked: an interlock mask is configured to disable this interlock condition for this Consumer.
The mask can be dynamically set from the application logic.

Quality Indication of the blocking / forcing status of the interlock source signal, and any Data source
quality error received from the OPC Server. In case the status is “Blocked” the value is simu-
lated and not updated by the process.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 26/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2.5.3. Viewer Example


The illustration below shows a motor faceplate and its PCC viewer, with relation to the rele-
vant information of the connected signal faceplates.

Figure 8 - PCC Viewer Example

2.5.4. Error indication and Diagnostics


Besides OPC Quality Bad (shown in the “Quality” Column) it might as well happen that the Ap-
plication or PCC Viewer configuration is not correct, and this will be indicated with “Configu-
ration Error” Message in the right lower corner as visible in following Figure:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 27/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 9 - PCC Viewer Configuration Error indication

In this case, additional information (log messages) are available in the “Diagnostics” dialog
available via right-click context menu in the viewer.

After initial download or after inserting new object in the control diagram, the PCC viewer will
only indicate the error message, until the object has been uploaded (inserted) to the func-
tional structure with the Uploader Tool.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 28/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3. MOT1

3.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type MOT1 is used to control a motor with one direction (one speed) in a
drive group or standalone.

In Addition to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions are
supported for MOT1:

– Motor current indication and high limit warning supervision

– User definable Warning indication

– 3 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Overtemp, Overload & Availability

– 2 functional back process inputs with feedback time supervision for e.g. speed, pressure
or flow supervision. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period time shown on
the Faceplate.

– 1 feedback run signal

– 1 Safety interlock, 1 Chain Auto Interlock, 4 Process interlocks, 1 Previous drive

– 2 of the in total 4 Process (run) interlocks, can be configured as start permissives

– Totalisation and indication of run time (in hours) and number of starts

– Fast Interlocking via PCC Signal connected via DISFastPCC Module

3.2. Control
3.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
Shown is the default view, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 29/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 10 - MOT1 Block

3.2.2. Parameter description

No Name Data Initial Val Port Dir Description


Type

1 Name string 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the motor (allowed
deliminators are "." and "-", no blanks ":"
or ";" allowed)

2 Description string 'Description' yes in IN: Description text of the motor

3 IO MOT1 default yes in_out IN/OUT: MOT1Data Variable


Data

4 Stw STWD default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module
ata STW (startwarning)

5 Group Grp- default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module
DrvCo GROUP (sequencer)
n

6 GrpStartStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999, if set to 0 -> not
part of group sequence

7 GrpStopStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

8 GrpStartDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay when started from group
sequence

9 GrpStopDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Stop delay when stopped from
group sequence

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 30/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10 PreSelection string cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.
Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR
P3 AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x
OR. No Spaces allowed.

11 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

12 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

13 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

14 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board /


Serial Interface

15 ME bool true yes left in_out IN true: Main control voltage distribu-
tion OK, disabling alarms generation

16 M1 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 1, default


"Overtemp"

17 M2 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 2, default


"Overload"

18 M3 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 3, default


"Availability"

19 FdBckRun bool yes left in_out IN: Run feedback signal, default "Con-
tactor On". If no IO available
MOT1Data.Out.Ord

20 FdBckTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Maximum delay time for contactor


response.

21 FB1 bool true yes left in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 1 from
process e.g. speed switch

22 FB1Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for functional back-


signal FB1, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

23 FB1Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0 = continuous signal; > 0 pulse time


where 1=0.1s; 999999 = 99999.9s; -1 =
cont. signal with FB Opn Alarm

24 FB2 bool true yes left in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 2 from
process e.g. pressure switch

25 FB2Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for functional back-


signal FB2, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

26 FB2Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0 = continous signal; -1 = cont. signal


with FB Opn Alarm enabled

27 FBTime time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time for FB1/2 re-
sponse and HiCurrent response

28 LcbStart bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: Start signal (pulse) from field
LCB. Start = 1

29 LcbStop bool true yes left in_out IN true: Any stop command (stop, not
remote..) from field LCB. Stop = 0

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 31/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

30 LcbRem bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Seq or Cen depend-
ing on config in MOT1_LCB

31 LcbLoc bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Loc depending on
config in MOT1_LCB

32 LcbMaint bool false yes left in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depend-
ing on user defined config in MOT1_LCB

33 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig,
1=POC LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with
LOC/REM DO, 3=POC LCB with Stop on
POC Chng, 4=POC CCR Start and Rem
Sig,

34 MC RealIO default yes left in_out IN: Motor Current or Motor Power

35 MCNominal real 0 no in INIT: Nominal (rated) current of the mo-


tor

36 Ord bool false yes out OUT: Start Order. Output to contactor.

37 LocAlarmAck bool false no out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to reset
alarms in SCP's)

38 PrevDrive bool true yes in IN true: Chain interlock "previous drive


running"

39 PrevDriveTxt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain interlock


with previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

40 IATxt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain / auto in-
terlock IA, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

41 IBF bool false no in IN: IB Function. If true, IB3 and IB4


works as start interlock.

42 IB1Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB1, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

43 IB2Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB2, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

44 IB3Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB3, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

45 IB4Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB4, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

46 ICTxt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety interlock


signal IC, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

47 StwCen bool cBMI.MOT.StwCen no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning


is triggered, when started from Cen-
tral/Sequence

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 32/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

48 StwField bool cBMI.MOT.StwField no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning


is triggered, when started from field
(from LCB)

49 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT.AutoMode no in INIT: 1=Disable IA in Man Mode if


EnAuto, 8= Wait for next Trigger for
Startup in AutoMode

50 EnAuto bool cBMI.MOT.EnAuto no in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto


mode is activated on sequence start

51 EnSeq bool cBMI.MOT.EnSeq no in IN true: Point of control Sequence ena-


ble

52 EnCen bool cBMI.MOT.EnCen no in IN true: Point of control Central enable

53 EnLoc bool cBMI.MOT.EnLoc no in IN: Point of control Loc enable

54 EnMaint bool cBMI.MOT.EnMaint no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable

55 EnFPLStopInAll- bool cBMI.MOT.EnFPLStopInA no in IN true: If false stop from faceplate only


Modes llModes works in POC Central

56 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List,


4 = Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 =
Status, 32 = Trend, 64 = Faceplate

57 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (pro-


cess section)

58 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

59 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.InterlockTr no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 =


ALPrio# (1=lowest)

60 ModeTr bool cBMI.MOT.ModeTr no in IN true: True enables events on mode


and point of control change

61 StatusTr bool cBMI.MOT.StatusTr no in IN true: True enables events on status


(on/off) change

62 IOStatTxt string cBMI.MOT.IOS_txt no in IN: Description text for Input/Output


board failure (IOStatus), for NLS sup-
port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

63 IOStat4Txt string cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure


usually used for serial interface supervi-
sion, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space

64 METxt string cBMI.MOT.ME_txt no in IN: Description text for control voltage


distribution supervision, for NLS sup-
port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

65 M1Txt string cBMI.MOT.M1_txt2 no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

66 M2Txt string cBMI.MOT.M2_txt2 no in IN: Description text for alarm M2, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 33/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J E C TS

67 M3Txt string cBMI.MOT.M3_txt2 no in IN: Description text for alarm M3, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

68 LcbStopTxt string cBMI.MOT.LocalStop_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local


Stopped", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

69 FdBckTxt string cBMI.MOT.Contactor_al_ no in INIT: Description text for alarm "Main


txt Contactor Error", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

70 MCTxt string cBMI.Logtxt.HighLoad no in IN: Description text for alarm "High Cur-
rent", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

71 WarningTxt string cBMI.MOT.Warning_txt no in IN: Description text for warning (warn-


ing does not stop the Motor), for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

72 MCHiLim real 100 no in IN: Motor current high limit in % of nom-


inal (rated) current

73 GrpRunOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal to


Group is set constant 1

74 GrpOffOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal to Group


is set constant 0

75 GrpTripOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip will not initiate an


auto change over of the preselections

76 GrpRFSOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start


won't be forwarded to the Group and
additionally, the Group will skip the Step
if not able to start

77 AlarmAck bool false no in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

3.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the MOT1 Control Module Type a Structured Data Type MOT1Data is available.
This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each motor in-
stance.

MOT1Data contains four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel

MOT1Data; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In MOT1Input retain Input variables to the motor

2 Out MOT1Output retain Output variables from the motor

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/Interlock


from Input modules to motor

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 34/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4 Process- Panel- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


Panel LinkCon-
sumer

MOT1Input; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSel bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected, con-
nected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

2 PreSelStdBy bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


standby, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to
Warning

3 EnSeqStart bool retain true IN true: a group start step will not acti-
vate the motor till this signal is true

4 EnSeqStop bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not stop
the motor till this signal is true

5 SeqStart bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external start command,


changes POC to Seq and starts the motor

6 SeqStop bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external stop command

7 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

8 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

9 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

10 IC bool retain true IN true: Safety interlock signal, active in


all operation modes.

11 IB1 bool retain true IN true: Operator blockable interlock sig-


nal, not active in Local mode

12 IB2 bool retain true IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Lo-
cal mode

13 IB3 bool retain true IN true: Operator blockable interlock sig-


nal, not active in Local mode. Works as
start intlk if IBF=1

14 IB4 bool retain true IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Lo-
cal mode. Works as start interlock if IBF
=1

15 IA bool retain true IN true: Auto and chain interlock signal.


Not included in RFS signal. If true drive
restarts in auto mode.

16 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning for the motor
control, creates a warning if true, no stop
of the motor

MOT1Output; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 35/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

1 Auto bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in Auto
mode.

2 Seq bool retain nosort Indication of point of operation SE-


Quence.

3 Cen bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in cen-
tral operation mode.

4 Loc bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in local
operation mode.

5 Maint bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


maintenance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is Out Of
Service

7 Trip bool retain nosort TRIPped indication, can be used to start


a redundant drive (Not Including Inter-
lock), activated by FdBckRun, M1, M2,
M3, M4, FB1, FB2

8 Rfs bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is Ready
For Start.

9 NoInt bool retain nosort No INTerlocks. The drive is ready for


start and no IA interlock.

10 Run bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is run-
displayvalue ning. condition is: Ord, FdBckRun, FB1,
FB2

11 Ord bool retain nosort Output Start Order 1 (also enabled when
simulation mode is on)

12 StartCnt dint coldretain no- Accumulated no of starts


sort

13 RuntimeCnt real coldretain no- Accumulated run time of motor


sort

14 ALNumber dint retain nosort Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
etc.)

15 ALPending bool retain nosort Indication of Pending Alarm

16 ALUnack bool retain nosort Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm

17 FieldStar- bool retain nosort Field Start Release is true in case of LOC
tRelease is selected and startconditions for the
mode are o.k.

18 ForcedRun bool retain nosort Indicating forced run, motor started by


e.g. hardwired LCB

19 FdBckOffErr bool retain nosort Main Contactor failed to open error


(Feedback Off Alarm present)

20 FB1PulseTime real retain nosort Actual Time for 1 FB1 pulse in seconds
(e.g. speed switch)

21 FirstOrMax- string[32] retain nosort '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first
AETag or highest Alarm or Event causing an ac-
tion on the Motor, Group or Valve

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 36/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

22 FirstOrMax- dint retain nosort 0 Indication treatment of the first or high-


AEIndTr est Alarm or Event causing an action ac-
croding to Minerals Library Alarm Indica-
tion Standards

23 LastReset date_and_time coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in


System Time

24 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of


the Last Trip

25 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time


PanelLinkConsumer; components

Name Data Attributes Initial Val Description


Type

1 Status dint retain nosort hidden Object Status Indication (Ready,


Run, NotRFS etc.)

2 StatusModes dint retain nosort hidden Object Modes Indication (Seq,


Cen, Loc etc.)

3 Cmd dint retain nosort hidden 99 Commands from Panel to Con-


sumers

4 CmdModes dint retain nosort hidden 99 Mode Commands from Panel to


Consumers

5 Blink bool retain nosort hidden Enabling of Consumer Blinking

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Ready_Off 0 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Ready_Run 3 2 Central Mode 1

3 NotRFS_Off 6 3 Local Mode 2

4 NotRFS_Run 7 4 Auto Mode 3

5 Fault_Off 9 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 Fault_Run 10 6 Out Of Service 9

7 FaultNotRFS_Off 12

8 FaultNotRFS_Run 13

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Start 0 1 SetCen 0

2 Stop 2 2 SetSeq 1

3 AlarmAck 7 3 SetLoc 2

4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 37/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 38/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.2.4. Project Constants


Name Default Value Data Type

1 cBMI.MOT.AutoMode dint 0

2 cBMI.MOT.Contactor_al_txt string 'Contactor Fault'

3 cBMI.MOT.DisabledIntMaxIndTr dint 13

4 cBMI.MOT.DisableFPLLocIfLCBIsPOCMaster bool true

5 cBMI.MOT.DisableIAPDInLoc bool true

6 cBMI.MOT.DisableIBInLoc bool true

7 cBMI.MOT.DisableIBInMaint bool true

8 cBMI.MOT.DisableICInMaint bool false

9 cBMI.MOT.EnALFieldMode bool true

10 cBMI.MOT.EnAuto bool false

11 cBMI.MOT.EnCen bool true

12 cBMI.MOT.EnFBFieldMode bool true

13 cBMI.MOT.EnFdBckFrcAlr bool true

14 cBMI.MOT.EnFPLStopInAllModes bool true

15 cBMI.MOT.EnLoc bool true

16 cBMI.MOT.EnMaint bool true

17 cBMI.MOT.EnMaintInCenSeq bool false

18 cBMI.MOT.EnMaintOnlyIfStopped bool false

19 cBMI.MOT.EnSeq bool true

20 cBMI.MOT.EventStarting bool false

21 cBMI.MOT.FB_Flow_txt string 'Flow'

22 cBMI.MOT.FB_Press_txt string 'Press'

23 cBMI.MOT.FB_Speed_txt string 'Speed'

24 cBMI.MOT.FieldStopIfNotRemOrLoc bool true

25 cBMI.MOT.IOS4StopMotor bool True

26 cBMI.MOT.IOS_txt string 'I/O Error'

27 cBMI.MOT.IOS_useSigErrTr bool false

28 cBMI.MOT.KeepMaintInCenSeq bool false

29 cBMI.MOT.LocalStop_txt string 'Local Stop'

30 cBMI.MOT.M1_Inverted bool false

31 cBMI.MOT.M1_txt string 'Not Available'

32 cBMI.MOT.M1_txt2 string 'Overtemp'

33 cBMI.MOT.M2_Inverted bool false

34 cBMI.MOT.M2_txt string 'Overload'

35 cBMI.MOT.M2_txt2 string 'Overload'

36 cBMI.MOT.M3_Inverted bool false

37 cBMI.MOT.M3_txt string 'Overtemp.'

38 cBMI.MOT.M3_txt2 string 'Not Available'

39 cBMI.MOT.ME_txt string 'Ctrl Voltage Trip'

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 39/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

40 cBMI.MOT.ModeTr bool true

41 cBMI.MOT.Monitor_al_txt string 'Monitor alarm'

42 cBMI.MOT.PCCStartIntMaxIndTr dint 14

43 cBMI.MOT.RunLoctxt string 'Run Local'

44 cBMI.MOT.Runtxt string 'Run'

45 cBMI.MOT.StatusTr bool true

46 cBMI.MOT.Stoptxt string 'Stopped'

47 cBMI.MOT.StwCen bool true

48 cBMI.MOT.StwField bool false

49 cBMI.MOT.Warning_txt string 'Summary Warning'

3.3. Operation
3.3.1. Graphic Elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_MOT1Consumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information as


symbol.

VCO_MOT1FBTxt Object feedback information as text.

VCO_MOT1MCValue Displays the actual motor current.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 40/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on MOT1 Faceplates

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on MOT1 Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Start MOT1 Acknowledge alarm

Stop MOT1 Change control point to sequence:


The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Set mode to Auto Change control point to central:


The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

Set mode to Manual Change control point to local


The object is controlled locally in the field
via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock cate-
gories are not active in Local.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 41/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name & De-


scription
Actual Current
in % of Nominal

Warning & Alarm


Indication Actual Current
Value

Motor Status

Normal View

Figure 11 - MOT1 Default Faceplate

Following Indications are given in the Default Faceplate

Abbr. Description

Sim The whole Group Sequence is simulated, Hardware Signals are ignored in this Mode!

Block Any Interlock or connected Signal is Blocked

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 42/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.2. Extended Info

More information to parent object (Trends, Alarm/Event Lists) and direct links to Consumer
Web interfaces or Object Overlap Displays are available on Demand.

Figure 12 - MOT1 Extended Info

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 43/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.3. Normal View

Figure 13 - MOT1 Normal View

If a “current” analog input signal is connected to the Parameter MC, the actual Nominal cur-
rent rate appears in the Faceplate.

Additional information for the MOT1 is structured in tabs. The available tabs and a short de-
scription of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 44/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual current value online trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

Maintenance Maintenance issues

3.3.2.4. Warning / Alarm / Interlock Indication on BaseControl

There are 3 alarm/interlock lines available on the faceplates default view.

Line 1: Alarm Indication, only visible when alarm is active and not blocked. If more than one
alarm is active only one is visible, highest priority first.

Line 2: Interlock indication, only visible when an interlock is active and not blocked. If more
than one interlock is active only one is shown, highest priority first.

Line 3: PCC Interlock, only visible when a PCC Interlock is active. If more than one PCC inter-
lock is active only one is shown, highest priority first. In addition, a link to PCC interlock trig-
gering object is presented.

Figure 14 - MOT1 Interlock Indication

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 45/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.5. Interlocks

Blocked
Interlock

Active
Interlock

Figure 15 - MOT1 Process Interlock

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

IC Safety interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
Active in all POC / modes. interlock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
Not active in POC Local interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
Not active in POC Local interlock is on.

IB3 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
Not active in POC Local interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow indica-
tion)

IB4 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
Not active in POC Local interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow indica-
tion)

IA Auto or Chain interlock Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.


Not active in POC Local If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts and
Stops the Motor.This can be used to start and stop an object by pro-
cess once the group or operator has put it to Auto.
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA stops the
motor and the motor must be started from Seq or Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PD Chain interlock, previous Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as the
drive interlock is on.
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 46/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.
All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

3.3.2.6. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below.

Direct Motor incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overtemp

– M2 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– M3 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– RUN Main Contactor on/off. Supervision for both directions. One delay timer.

– FB1 Supervision of "functional backsignal" e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period time
shown on the Faceplate.

– FB2 Supervision of "functional backsignal" e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch. Delay
timer

NB: FB1 and FB2 are overridden in Local Mode on LcbStart

Additionally, Direct Motor incorporates the following 2 Warnings (do not trip the motor):

– HighCurrent Supervision of motor current. Shown on Faceplate and in


Alarm List only while Motor is running.

– General Warning User Defined Warning. Only shown as Warning on Faceplate,


no Alarm is generated

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2/M3, but signal input level can be changed to 0
for normal status by project constants.

In total, 3 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, M2, M3, LCB, RUN, FB1 and FB2 not going in (Contactor On/Trip Alarm)

– one for RUN, FB1 and FB2 not going Off (Contactor Off/Frc Alarm)

– one for High Current alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 47/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

Active
Alarm

Figure 16 - MOT1 Active Alarm

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor
(no alarm generated)

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm gener-
ated). Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Overtemp” as the alarm is on.

M2 MCC interface signal 2 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Overload” as the alarm is on.

M3 MCC interface signal 3 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Availability” as the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the
operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can al-
ways be done independent from the POC. The motor will always
turn to manual mode.

FB Feedback motor running The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback time.
The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via the Pa-
rameter List and is set per default to 2s.

FB1 Functional Back signal 1 The FB1 signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback
e.g. Speed Switch time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via
the Parameter List and is set per default to 10s. It has a special
mode for pulsed speed switches when FB1Mode is higher than
0.

FB2 Functional Back signal 2 Like FB1 but does not support pulses.
e.g. Pressure Switch

Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 48/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.
All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false”, the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on MOT1 graphic Element directly and on the MOT1Tag.

3.3.2.7. Trend

On-Line trend with actual current Rate

Show/Hide Grid

Zoom Out (Y-Axis)


Switch between ac-
tual current and ac-
tual current in % of
Record Time nominal

Figure 17 - MOT1 Trend Indication

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 49/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.8. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Motor will be started with step


number 20 in the Drive Group with a de-
lay of 5 seconds and only if pre-selection
P1, P2 or P3 is selected

This Motor will be stopped with step


number 1020 in the Drive Group with a
delay of 5 seconds

Figure 18 - MOT1Group.Step Indication

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Start Sequential start order of the mo- Start delay of the motor Preselection Condition
tor within the Drive Group e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
(P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Stop Sequential stop order of the mo- Stop delay of the motor n.a
tor within the Drive Group

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive n.a. n.a.


Group
When a motor is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 50/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.2.9. Maintenance

Last Reset Time

Figure 19 - MOT1 Maintenance tab

Simulation” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox and Reset Counters button are
only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the motor is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual motor while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Drive to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Last Trip Reason The Reason of the Last Trip contains the Alarm, Interlock or PCC Text that was ac-
tive at the time of the last Trip

Last Trip Date Date and Time the Motor has tripped last

Latest Pulse Time This Value is only visible if FB1 is configured

Number of Starts Number of starts of the motor

Run Time Time in hours that the motors has been running

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of starts and Run Time

Last Reset Time Date and Time the Number of Starts and Run Time was last reset

3.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar) can be
configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in the Con-
trol Structure or in the Object Type Structure

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 51/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 20 - MOT1 Faceplate Control

3.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list

3.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOT1 object the following message structure applies:

[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field, Local Control Box)

Out Motor is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 52/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Frc Motor is in Forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Starting Motor is starting

Run Motor is running

Off Motor is stopped

[STOP REASON] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock from the Group

IC Stopped due to IC interlock

IB1 Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Stopped due to IB2 interlock

IB3 Stopped due to IB3 interlock

IB4 Stopped due to IB4 interlock

IA Stopped due to IA interlock

PD Stopped due to Previous Drive

PCC-IC Stopped due to IC interlock via PCC

PCC-IB Stopped due to IB interlock via PCC

PCC-IA Stopped due to IA interlock via PCC

PCC-PD Stopped due to PD interlock via PCC

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB3 IB3 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB4 IB4 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IA IA interlock is blocked in the faceplate

FB1 Feedback fault 1 is blocked in the faceplate

FB2 Feedback fault 2 is blocked in the faceplate

PD Previous Drive is blocked in the faceplate

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 53/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message depends on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For MOT1 the following messages are availa-
ble to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

M2 M2Txt

M3 M3Txt

Local Stop LcbStopTxt

Contactor Fault FdBckTxt

Feedback 1 Fault FB1Txt

Feedback 2 Fault FB2Txt


These text parameters can be changed in the motor control module from Control Builder.

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FdBckTxt as well as FB1Txt and FB2Txt will
be added that gives the reason for the Alarm.

Suffix Text Constant Reason

On cBMI.AE.FBFail_On_SuffixTxt FB not true after FBTime

Trip cBMI.AE.FBFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB goes false while running

Off cBMI.AE.FBFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB not false after FBTime

Frc cBMI.AE.FBFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB goes true while stopped

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 54/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4. MOT1_VVVF

4.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type MOT1_VVVF is used to control a motor with one direction and varia-
ble speed in a drive group or standalone.

In addition to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions are
supported for MOT1_VWF:

– Motor current indication and high limit warning supervision

– User definable Warning indication

– Motor speed indication

– Actual Speed and Speed setpoint will generate error control when quality is Bad or Uncer-
tain.

– Speed setpoint coming from the corresponding drive group, loop control connection or
control application (External Setpoint) or from the Operator Station or from the Process
Panel (Internal Setpoint)

– Speed set point low and high limitation, Speed Deviation Alarm, coming from the corre-
sponding drive group or application or from the Operator Station

– 3 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Overtemp, Overload & Availability

– 2 functional back process inputs with feedback time supervision for e.g. speed, pressure
or flow supervision. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period time shown on
the Faceplate.

– 1 feedback run signal

– 1 Safety interlock, 1 Chain Auto Interlock, 4 Process interlocks, 1 Previous drive

– 2 of the in total 4 Process (run) interlocks, can be configured as start permissives

– Totalisation and indication of run time (in hours) and number of starts

– Supervision of the Actual Speed feedback during Start and Stop as configurable condition
for alarming and feedback to the drive group

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 55/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.2. Control
4.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

Figure 21 - MOT1VVVF Block

4.2.2. Parameter description

No Name Data Type Initial Val Por Dir Description


t

1 Name string[24] 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the motor (allowed
deliminators are "." and "-", no blanks ":"
or ";" allowed)

2 Description string[40] 'Description' yes in IN: Description text of the motor

3 IO MOT1VVVF default yes in_ IN/OUT: MOT1VVVFData Variable


Data out

4 SPExtRef LoopCon- default no in IN(OUT): External Setpoint Connection


trolData from Controller

5 Stw STWData default yes in_ IN/OUT: Connection to control module


left out STW (startwarning)

6 Group GrpDrvCon default yes in_ IN/OUT: Connection to control module


left out GROUP (sequence)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 56/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7 GrpStartStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999, if set to 0 -> not
part of group sequence

8 GrpStopStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

9 GrpStartDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay when started from group
sequence

10 GrpStopDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Stop delay when stopped from
group sequence

11 PreSelection string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.
Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR
P3 AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x
OR. No Spaces allowed.

12 SPIntPar SpeedPara- default no in_ IN/OUT: Interaction Parameter for


mIntAct out Speed settings on Faceplate

13 ExternalSPIntPar bool false no in INIT: External Speed Setpoint and Limit


(e.g. from DriveGroup) connected to
SPIntPar Parameter

14 SpeedSp RealIO yes out IN/OUT: Output for Speed Setpoint con-
nected to VVVF drive, use an AOX but
not an AOS on this output

15 ExternalSPLimits bool false no in IN: if true, SetpH, SetpL are controlled


from the application, if false from FPL

16 SetpH real 100 no in COLD INIT: initial Setpoint high limit

17 SetpL real 0 no in COLD INIT: initial Setpoint low limit

18 ExternalStartSpeedSP bool true no in IN: if true, StartSpeedSP is controlled


from the application, if false from FPL

19 StartSpeedSP real 0 no in COLD INIT: initial Start Speed Setpoint

20 ActualSpeed RealIO yes in_ IN/OUT: Input for Actual Speed con-
left out nected to the VVVF drive

21 RFSonSigErr bool false no in IN False: If true, the drive remains Ready


for Start even if SpeedSp Signal Error is
active

22 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

23 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

24 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

25 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board /


Serial Interface

26 ME bool true yes in_ IN true: Main control voltage distribu-


left out tion OK

27 M1 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 1, default


"Overtemp"

28 M2 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 2, default


"Overload"

29 M3 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 3, default


"Availability"

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 57/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

30 FdBckRun bool yes in_ IN: Run feedback signal, default "Con-
left out tactor On". If no IO signal is available
use MOT1VVVFData.Out.Ord

31 FdBckTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Maximum delay time for contactor


on / off response.

32 FB1 bool true yes in_ IN true: Functional backsignal 1 from


left out process e.g. speed switch

33 FB1Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for functional back-


signal FB1, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

34 FB1Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0 = continous signal; > 0 pulse fre-


quency in 0.1s; -1 = cont. signal with FB
Opn Alarm enabled

35 FB2 bool true yes in_ IN true: Functional backsignal 2 from


left out process e.g. pressure switch

36 FB2Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for functional back-


signal FB2, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

37 FB2Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0 = continous signal; -1 = cont. signal


with FB Opn Alarm enabled

38 FBTime time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time for FB1/2 re-
sponse

39 FB3Mode dint cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Enable FB3, 0=None, 1=FB3Run,


F.FB3Mode 2=FB3Off, 16=FB3Off_EnTrip, binary
combination allowed

40 ExternalFB3RunLimit dint cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=by FPL, 1=by


F.Exter- Application
nalFB3RunLimit

41 FB3RunSpeedLim real 0.0 no in COLD INIT: initial Min Speed value as


part of Run condition to Step On full-
filled

42 FB3RunSpeedTime time cBMI.Time10s no in COLD INIT: initial Maximum delay time


for FB3RunSpeedLim

43 FB3RunSpeedHyst real 1.0 no in COLD INIT: initial Deviation Hysteresis in


%, used to calculate
IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond

44 ExternalFB3OffLimit dint cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=by FPL, 1=by


F.Exter- Application
nalFB3OffLimit

45 FB3OffSpeedLim real 100.0 no in COLD INIT: initial Min Speed Value as


Part of Off condition to Step Off full-
filled

46 FB3OffSpeedTime time cBMI.Time10s no in COLD INIT: initial Maximum delay time


for FB3OffSpeedLim

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 58/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

47 FB3Txt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for FB3, for NLS
F.FB3Txt support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

48 LcbStart bool false yes in_ IN pulse: Local start signal (pulse) from
left out field LCB. Function depending on LCB
Type, default Start = false -> true transi-
tion

49 LcbStop bool true yes in_ IN true: Local stop signal (stop, not re-
left out mote..) from field LCB. Function de-
pending on LCB Type, default Stop =
false

50 LcbRem bool false yes in_ IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
left out point of control to Seq or Cen depend-
ing on config in MOT1_VVVF_LCB

51 LcbLoc bool false yes in_ IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
left out point of control to Loc depending on
config in MOT1_VVVF_LCB

52 LcbMaint bool false yes in_ IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depend-
left out ing on user defined config in
MOT1_VVVF_LCB

53 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig,
1=POC LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with
LOC/REM DO, 3=POC LCB with Stop on
POC Chng, 4=POC CCR Start and Rem
Sig,

54 LcbSpeedInc bool false yes in_ IN false: Increase speed signal from field
left out LCB

55 LcbSpeedDec bool false yes in_ IN false: Decrease speed signal from
left out field LCB

56 LcbSpeed real 1 no in IN 1: Change rate for Speed Setpoint by


LCB increase/decrease engineering unit
/ Normal task time

57 MC RealIO default yes in_ IN: Motor current or motor power


left out

58 MCNominal real 0 no in INIT: Nominal (rated) current or power


of the motor

59 Ord bool false yes out OUT: Start Order. Output to contactor.

60 LocAlarmAck bool false no out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to reset
alarms in SCP's)

61 PrevDrive bool true yes in IN true: Chain interlock "previous drive


running"

62 PrevDriveTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Descrption text for chain interlock


with previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

63 IATxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain / auto in-
terlock IA, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 59/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

64 IBF bool false no in IN: IB Function. If true, IB3 and IB4


works as start interlock

65 IB1Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB1, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

66 IB2Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB2, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

67 IB3Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB3, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

68 IB4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for interlock signal


IB4, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

69 ICTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety interlock


signal IC, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

70 StwCen bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning


F.StwCen is triggered, when started from Cen-
tral/Sequence

71 StwField bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning


F.StwField is triggered, when started from field
(from LCB)

72 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in INIT: 1 = Disable IA in Man Mode if


F.AutoMode EnAuto, 8 = Wait for next PCC
Auto_Start for Startup in Auto Mode, 48
= Keep Auto if Interlock/Trip

73 EnAuto bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto


F.EnAuto mode is activated on sequence start

74 EnSeq bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: Point of control Sequence ena-


F.EnSeq ble

75 EnCen bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: Point of control Central enable


F.EnCen

76 EnLoc bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Point of control Local enable


F.EnLoc

77 EnMaint bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable


F.EnMaint

78 EnFPLStopInAllModes bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: If false stop from faceplate only


F.EnFPL- works in POC Central
StopInAllModes

79 EnSPExt bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN false: Mode external speed setpoint


F.EnSPExt (e.g. from PID) enable

80 EnSPInt bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: Mode internal speed setpoint


F.EnSPInt (from faceplate) enable

81 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List,


4 = Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 =
Status, 32 = Trend, 64 = Faceplate

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 60/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

82 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (pro-


cess section)

83 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

84 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.Interloc no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 =


kTr ALPrio# (1=lowest)

85 DevTr dint cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in INIT: Alarm treatment for deviation: -1


F.DevTr no AE; 0 = Event ; 1,2,3 = ALPrio# (1=low-
est)

86 ModeTr bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: True enables events on mode


F.ModeTr and point of control change

87 StatusTr bool cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN true: True enables events on status


F.StatusTr (on/off) change

88 IOStatTxt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for Input/Output


F.IOS_txt board failure (IOStatus), for NLS sup-
port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

89 IOStat4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure


usally used for serial interface supervi-
sion, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
fix

90 METxt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for control voltage


F.ME_txt distribution supervision, for NLS sup-
port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

91 M1Txt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for
F.M1_txt NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

92 M2Txt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for alarm M2, for
F.M2_txt NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

93 M3Txt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for alarm M3, for
F.M3_txt NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

94 LcbStopTxt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local


F.LocalStop_txt Stopped", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

95 FdBckTxt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for alarm "Main


F.Contac- Contactor Error", for NLS support use
tor_al_txt ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

96 MCTxt string[35] cBMI.Logtxt.Hig no in IN: Description text for alarm "High Cur-
hLoad rent", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 61/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

97 WarningTxt string[35] cBMI.MOT1_VVV no in IN: Description text for warning (warn-


F.Warning_txt ing does not stop the Motor), for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

98 MCHiLim real 100 no in IN: Motor current high limit in % of nom-


inal (rated) current

99 GrpRunOverride bool false no in IN false: If true group does not go to


HOLD in case the drive is stopped while
group is running

100 GrpOffOverride bool false no in IN false: If true the group does assume
the drive is OFF even if it is running

101 GrpTripOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip will not initiate an
auto change over of the preselections

102 GrpFB3OffStepOverride dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Go to next stop step: 0=wait till
ActSpeed =<FB3OffSpeedLim, 1=wait
till FB3Off cond ok or Warn/Trip, 2=Ig-
nore OffSpeed and continue

103 GrpRFSOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start
won't be forwarded to the Group and
additionally, the Group will skip the Step
if not able to start

104 AlarmAck bool false no in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

105 TrackMan bool true no in IN: true: Internal setpoint tracks the ex-
ternal speed setpoint in case the drive
is in SPExt mode

4.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the MOT1_VVVF Control Module Type a Structured Data Type MOT1VVVFData
is available. This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each
motor instance.

MOT1VVVFData contains the four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In MOT1VVVFInput retain Input variables to the motor

2 Out MOT1VVVFOutput retain Output variables from the motor

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/In-


terlock from Input modules to VVVF

4 Process- PanelLinkCon- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


Panel sAndSP

MOT1VVVFInput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSel bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected, con-
nected to PreBinData.PreSel in case parame-
terized PreSelection is not used.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 62/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2 PreSelStdBy bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


standby, only used in case of cBMI.StdType =
1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

3 EnSeqStart bool retain true IN true: a group start step will not activate
the motor till this signal is true

4 EnSeqStop bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not stop the
motor till this signal is true

5 SeqStart bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external start command

6 SeqStop bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external stop Command

7 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

8 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

9 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

10 IC bool retain true IN true: Safety interlock signal, active in all


operation modes.

11 IB1 bool retain true IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode

12 IB2 bool retain true IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local
mode

13 IB3 bool retain true IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode. Works as start intlk
if IBF=1

14 IB4 bool retain true IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local
mode. Works as start interlock if IBF =1

15 IA bool retain true IN true: Auto and chain interlock signal. Not
included in RFS signal. If true drive restarts
in auto mode.

16 SetSpInt bool retain hidden false IN pulse: Set operation mode to Internal set-
point output reference from FPL

17 SetSpExt bool retain hidden false IN pulse: Set operation mode to external set-
point output reference from e.g. PID loop

18 ExtSpeedRef real retain 0.0 IN: EXTernal Speed REFerence for the drive
when e.g. controlled by a PID loop.

19 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning for the motor con-
trol, creates a warning if true, no stop of the
motor

MOT1VVVFOutput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Init.Val Description

1 Auto bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in Auto
mode.

2 Seq bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


point of control sequence.

3 Cen bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


point of control central.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 63/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4 Loc bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


point of control local.

5 Maint bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


maintenance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is Out Of
Service

7 Trip bool retain nosort TRIPped indication, can be used to start


a redundant drive, activated by
FdBckRun, M1, M2, M3, M4, FB1, FB2,
FB3(if configured for Trip)

8 Rfs bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is Ready
For Start.

9 NoInt bool retain nosort No INTerlocks. The drive is ready for


start and no IA interlock.

10 Run bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is run-
displayvalue ning. condition is: Ord, FdBckRun, FB1,
FB2, FB3(if configured for RunLimit)

11 Ord bool retain nosort Output Start Order 1 (also enabled when
simulation mode is on)

12 StartCnt dint coldretain Accumulated no of starts


nosort

13 RuntimeCnt real coldretain Accumulated run time of motor


nosort

14 SetpointSpeed real retain nosort Setpoint Speed connected to VVVF drive

15 SpExt bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the VVVF is con-
trolled by an external speed reference

16 Deviation real retain nosort Actual Speed Deviation in %

17 DevH bool retain nosort Actual Deviation > High alarm limit

18 DevL bool retain nosort Actual Deviation < Low alarm limit

19 ALNumber dint retain nosort Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
etc.)

20 ALPending bool retain nosort Indication of Pending Alarm

21 ALUnack bool retain nosort Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm

22 FieldStartRelease bool retain nosort Field Start Release is true in case of LOC
is selected and startconditions for the
mode are o.k.

23 ForcedRun bool retain nosort Indicating forced run, motor started by


e.g. hardwired LCB

24 FdBckOffErr bool retain nosort Main Contactor failed to open error


(Feedback Off Alarm present)

25 FB1PulseTime real retain nosort Actual Time for 1 FB1 pulse in seconds
(e.g. speed switch)

26 SigErr bool retain nosort Signal Error summing SpeedSetpoint


and ActualSpeed Sig Error Status

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 64/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC T S

27 FirstOrMaxAETag string[32] retain nosort '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first
or highest Alarm or Event causing an ac-
tion on the Motor, Group or Valve

28 FirstOrMax- dint retain nosort 0 Indication treatment of the first or high-


AEIndTr est Alarm or Event causing an action ac-
croding to Minerals Library Alarm Indica-
tion Standards

29 LastReset date_and_ti coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in


me System Time

30 DrvRunSpeedCond bool retain nosort Drive run above FB3RunSpeedLim after


start and can reset bellow hysteresis or
stop drive

31 DrvOffSpeedCond bool retain nosort Drive stopped and actual speed is bellow
FB3OffSpeedLimit

32 DrvOffSpeedTrip bool retain nosort Drive FB3 OFF Trip supervision active

33 DrvRunOnSpeedSP bool retain nosort Drive reach speed setpoint once after
start, reset within stop

34 FastRamp bool retain nosort 0 Fast Ramp stopping bit, Updated by PCC
Intlk, Used for VVVF Drive

35 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of


the Last Trip

36 LastTrip date_and_ti retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time


me

SpeedParamIntAct; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 SetSPExt bool retain 0 Set Setpoint External Mode

2 SetSPInt bool retain 0 Set Setpoint Internal Mode

3 Increase bool retain no- false Increase output signal by IncDec-


sort Step, only allowed in SPInt Mode

4 Decrease bool retain no- false Decrease output signal by IncDec-


sort Step, only allowed in SPInt Mode

5 IncDecStepX real coldretain 1.0 Stepsize for Increase and Decrease


nosort commands for X

6 AutoIncDecStepX bool coldretain true enable automatic Calculation of


nosort IncDecStep from Signal Range for X

7 IncDecStepY real coldretain 1.0 Stepsize for Increase and Decrease


nosort commands for Y

8 AutoIncDecStepY bool coldretain true enable automatic Calculation of


nosort IncDecStep from Signal Range for Y

9 MaxChangeIncX real coldretain 100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in


nosort positive direction (only used in
Graphics)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 65/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10 MaxChangeDecX real coldretain -100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in


nosort negative direction (only used in
Graphics)

11 EnableChangeCtrlX bool coldretain false Enable MaxChangeInc / Dec Limits


nosort in DEW (only used in Graphics)

12 MaxChangeIncY real coldretain 100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in


nosort positive direction (only used in
Graphics)

13 MaxChangeDecY real coldretain -100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in


nosort negative direction (only used in
Graphics)

14 EnableChangeCtrlY bool coldretain false Enable MaxChangeInc / Dec Limits


nosort in DEW (only used in Graphics)

15 SetpXH real coldretain 100.0 High limit for speed setpointX


nosort

16 SetpXL real coldretain 0.0 Low limit for speed setpointX


nosort

17 SetpYH real coldretain 100.0 High limit for speed setpointY


nosort

18 SetpYL real coldretain 0.0 Low limit for speed setpointY


nosort

19 SetpSpeedX real coldretain 100.0 Max Change Speed of SetpointX in


nosort %/s

20 SetpSpeedY real coldretain 100.0 Max Change Speed of SetpointY in


nosort %/s

21 StartSpeedSPX real coldretain 0.0 Speed SetpointX when starting the


nosort Drive

22 StartSpeedSPY real coldretain 0.0 Speed SetpointY when starting the


nosort Drive

23 UseLastSpeedAs- bool coldretain false Overwrite StartSpeedSPX with cur-


StartSpeedX nosort rent Setpoint

24 UseLastSpeedAs- bool coldretain false Overwrite StartSpeedSPY with cur-


StartSpeedY nosort rent Setpoint

25 SetpointX real retain no- 0 Man setpointX, reference value


sort when in man

26 SetpointY real retain no- 0 Man setpointY, reference value


sort when in man

27 DevHLim real coldretain 100.0 Limit for Deviation high alarm in %


nosort

28 DevLLim real coldretain -100.0 Limit for Deviation low alarm in %


nosort

29 DevHyst real coldretain 1.0 Deviation hysteresis in %


nosort

30 DevAlarmDelay time coldretain 10s Time delay for the speed deviation
nosort supervision

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 66/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

31 FB3RunSpeedLimX real coldretain 0 Min Speed Value as Part of Run con-


dition to Step On fullfilled for DirX

32 FB3RunSpeedTimeX time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for


FB3RunSpeedLimX

33 FB3RunSpeedLimY real coldretain 0 Min Speed Value as Part of Run con-


dition to Step On fullfilled for DirY

34 FB3RunSpeedTimeY time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for


FB3RunSpeedLimY

35 FB3RunSpeedHyst real coldretain 1.0 Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to


calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond,
same param for X and Y

36 FB3OffSpeedLimX real coldretain 100.0 Min Speed Value as Part of Off con-
dition to Step Off fullfilled for DirX

37 FB3OffSpeedTimeX time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for


FB3OffSpeedLimX

38 FB3OffSpeedLimY real coldretain 100.0 Min Speed Value as Part of Off con-
dition to Step On fullfilled for DirY

39 FB3OffSpeedTimeY time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for


FB3OffSpeedLimY

PanelLinkConsAndSP; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Status dint retain nosort Object Status Indication (Ready, Run,


hidden NotRFS etc.)

2 Sta- dint retain nosort Object Modes Indication (Seq, Cen,


tusModes hidden Loc etc.)

3 Cmd dint retain nosort 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers


hidden

4 CmdModes dint retain nosort 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Con-


hidden sumers

5 Blink bool retain nosort Enabling of Consumer Blinking


hidden

6 Setpoint real retain nosort Setpoint from Process Panel to Con-


hidden sumers

7 MeasValue real retain nosort Measured Value from Consumer to


hidden Process Panel

8 EnSPField bool retain nosort Enabling of Setpoint Input Field


hidden

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 67/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Ready_Off 0 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Ready_Run 3 2 Central Mode 1

3 NotRFS_Off 6 3 Local Mode 2

4 NotRFS_Run 7 4 Auto Mode 3

5 Fault_Off 9 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 Fault_Run 10 6 External Mode 5

7 FaultNotRFS_Off 12 7 ExternalCen Mode 6

8 FaultNotRFS_Run 13 8 ExtCen Mode 7

9 AutoSPExt Mode 8

10 Out Of Service 9

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Start 0 1 SetCen 0

2 Stop 2 2 SetSeq 1

3 AlarmAck 7 3 SetLoc 2

4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

6 SetExt 5

7 SetInt 6

4.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRef LCC


The MOT1_VVVF supports LCC for the SPExt Mode external Setpoint Reference. Please refer
to the 03 Loop Objects Manual for a description of this Datatype.

4.2.4.1. Backtracking

Set if the MOT1_VVVF is not running in SPExt Mode, is Interlocked or Tripped. In SPInt Mode,
the backtracking value is the current Speed, while in stopped condition, the backtracking
value is set to Start Speed SP.

4.2.4.2. Min Reached / Max Reached

Set when the MOT1_VVVF internal configured Limits are reached. The SpeedSP Output Pa-
rameter Value will always be kept inside the Limits independent of the Backtracking Support
of the Block connected via LCC.

4.2.4.3. Communication Error

In case SPExtRef is connected from a Communication Variable and the Communication is


lost, the MOT1_VVVF changes to SPInt Mode (Internal Setpoint Reference). If EnSPInt is false,
the MOT1_VVVF will stay in SPExt and the IO.In.ExtSpeedRef is used instead, therefore the
IO.In.ExtSpeedRef has to be set to the required ISP Value.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 68/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.2.5. Project Constants


Name Default Value Data Type

1 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.AutoMode dint 0

2 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Contactor_al_txt string 'Contactor Fault'

3 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DevMode dint 0

4 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DevTr dint 2

5 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisabledIntMaxIndTr dint 13

6 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisableFPLLocIfLCBIsPOCMaster bool true

7 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisableIAPDInLoc bool true

8 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisableIBInLoc bool true

9 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisableIBInMaint bool true

10 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.DisableICInMaint bool false

11 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnALFieldMode bool true

12 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnAuto bool false

13 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnCen bool true

14 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnFB3Off dword 16#2

15 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnFB3Run dword 16#1

16 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnFBFieldMode bool true

17 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnFdBckFrcAlr bool true

18 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnFPLStopInAllModes bool true

19 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnLoc bool true

20 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnMaint bool true

21 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnMaintInCenSeq bool false

22 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnMaintOnlyIfStopped bool false

23 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnSeq bool true

24 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnSPExt bool false

25 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EnSPInt bool true

26 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.EventStarting bool false

27 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ExternalFB3Limit dword 16#1

28 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ExternalFB3OffLimit dint 0

29 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ExternalFB3RunLimit dint 0

30 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ExternalStartSpeedSP bool true

31 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB3Mode dint 0

32 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB3Off_EnTrip dword 16#10

33 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB3Txt string 'Speed Supervision'

34 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB_Flow_txt string 'Flow'

35 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB_Press_txt string 'Press'

36 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB_Speed_txt string 'Speed'

37 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FieldStopIfNotRemOrLoc bool true

38 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.IOS4StopMotor bool True

39 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.IOS_txt string 'I/O Error'

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 69/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

40 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.KeepMaintInCenSeq bool false

41 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.LocalStop_txt string 'Local Stop'

42 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M1_Inverted bool false

43 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M1_txt string 'Overtemp'

44 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M2_Inverted bool false

45 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M2_txt string 'Overload'

46 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M3_Inverted bool false

47 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.M3_txt string 'Not Available'

48 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ME_txt string 'Ctrl Voltage Trip'

49 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.ModeTr bool true

50 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Monitor_al_txt string 'Monitor alarm'

51 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.RFSonSigErr bool false

52 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.RunLoctxt string 'Run Local'

53 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Runtxt string 'Run'

54 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.StatusTr bool true

55 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Stoptxt string 'Stopped'

56 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.StwCen bool true

57 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.StwField bool false

58 cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Warning_txt string 'Summary Warning'

4.3. Operation
4.3.1. Graphic Elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_MOT1_VVVFConsumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm infor-


mation as symbol.

VCO_MOT1_VVVFCtrl Displays object control information. Allows direct en-


try of set-point.

VCO_MOT1_VVVFFBTxt Object feedback information as text.

VCO_MOT1_VVVFMCValue Displays the actual motor current.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation.

4.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on MOT1_VVVF Faceplates

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 70/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on MOT1_VVVF Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Start MOT1_VVVF Change control point to sequence:


The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Stop MOT1_VVVF Change control point to central:


The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

Change Operation Mode to Change control point to local


SPExt: External set point written The object is controlled locally in the field
from the application. via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock catego-
ries are not active in Local

Change Operation Mode to SPInt: Set mode to Auto


Set point entered from the face-
plate.

Acknowledge alarm Set mode to Manual

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 71/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.2.1. Default View

Actual Current
Tag Name & De-
in % of Nominal
scription

Actual Current
Warning & Alarm
Value
Indication

Motor Status

Setpoint Indica-
tion

Extended View

Actual Setpoint
Normal View
Feedback

Figure 22 - MOT1VVVF Default View

If a “current” analog input signal is connected to the Parameter MC the actual Nominal cur-
rent rate appears in the Faceplate (Default and Extended View).

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT1

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 72/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3. Normal View

Figure 23 - MOT1VVVF Normal view

Additional information for the MOT1_VVVF is structured in tabs. The available tabs and a
short description of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual current, speed and speed setpoint value online trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

Maintenance Maintenance issues

IOStatus Substatus for DP, PA, FF Field Devices and LCC connected to Actual Speed, Output and
SPExtRef

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 73/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3.1. Interlocks

Figure 24 - MOT1VVVF Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

IC Safety interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Active in all modes. the interlock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Not active in point of control Local the interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Not active in POC Local the interlock is on.

IB3 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Not active in POC Local the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow in-
dication)

IB4 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Not active in POC Local the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow in-
dication)

IA Auto and Chain interlock If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts and
Not active in POC Local Stops the Motor.
This can be used to start and stop an object by process signals or
application logic.
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA stops
the motor and the motor must be started from Seq or Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PD Chain interlock, previous drive Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long as
Not active in POC Local the interlock is on.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 74/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.
– All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

– Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

4.3.3.2. PCC Interlocks

Figure 25 - MOT1VVVF PCC Interlocks

Reference Table, PCC Interlocks

Type of interlock

IC Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

IB Same functionality as IB1 as described on Interlock chapter.

IA Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

PD Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.


For possible configuration setting for Interlock Type and Interlock Direction refer to PCC, In-
terlock Bus (Process Control Connection) at Basic Object Reference Manual.

4.3.3.3. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 75/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below.

Direct Motor incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overtemp

– M2 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– M3 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– RUN Main Contactor on/off. Supervision for both directions. One delay timer.

– FB1 Supervision of "functional backsignal" e.g. rotation, pressure, flow


switch. Delay timer. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period
time shwon on the Faceplate.

– FB2 Supervision of "functional backsignal" e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer

– FB3 Supervision the speed after Start up, operation or after Stop.

NB: FB1, FB2 and FB3 are overridden in POC Local while LcbStart is true (Start Button is
pressed)

Additionally, Direct Motor incorporates the following Warnings (do not trip the motor):

– HighCurrent : Supervision of motor current. Can be indicated simultaneously with one on


the alarms/faults above.

– Deviation High / Low: Supervision of the Difference between the Actual Speed and Set
Point

– General Warning: User Defined Warning

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2/M3 signal input level can be changed to 0 for
normal status by project constants.

In total, 4 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, M2, M3, LCB and RUN, FB1, FB2 and FB3 not going in (Contactor On Alarm)

– one for RUN, FB1 and FB2 not going Off (Contactor Off Alarm)

– one for High Current Alarm

– one for the Deviation Alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 76/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 26 - MOT1VVVF Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor
(no alarm generated)

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm gener-
ated). Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Overtemp” as the alarm is on.

M2 MCC interface signal 2 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Overload” as the alarm is on.

M3 MCC interface signal 3 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is "Availability” as the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the
operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can al-
ways be done independent from the POC. The motor will always
turn to manual mode.

FB Feedback motor running The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback time.
The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via the Pa-
rameter List and is set per default to 2s.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 77/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

FB1 Functional Back signal 1 The FB1 signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback
e.g. Speed Switch time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via
the Parameter List and is set per default to 10s. It has a special
mode for pulsed speed switches when FB1Mode is higher than
0.

FB2 Functional Back signal 2 Like FB1 but does not support pulses.
e.g. Pressure Switch

FB3 Functional Back signal 3 for Configurable as Alarm or warning to speed supervision at
Speed Supervision starting, running or stopping.
Refer to chapter Speed Supervision.

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.
– All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

– All alarms are shown on MOT1_VVVF graphic Element directly and on the MOT1_VVVFTag.

4.3.3.4. Trend

On-Line trend with actual current, speed and speed setpoint.

Show/Hide Grid
Zoom Out (Y-Axis)

Switch between ac-


tual current and ac-
Record Time
tual current in % of
nominal

Figure 27 - MOT1VVVF Trends

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 78/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 28 - MOT1VVVF Value Indication on Trends

4.3.3.5. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Motor will be started with step


number 50 in the Drive Group with a de-
lay of 3 seconds and only if pre-selection
P1, P2 or P3 is selected

This Motor will be stopped with step


number 2050 in the Drive Group with a
delay of 3 seconds

Figure 29 - MOT1VVVF Group Step Indication

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Start Sequential start order of the Start delay of the Preselection Condition
motor within the Drive Group motor e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
(P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Stop Sequential stop order of the Stop delay of the n.a.


motor within the Drive Group motor

No of Steps Max number of steps in the n.a. n.a.


Drive Group
When a motor is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 79/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3.6. Maintenance

Last Reset Time

Figure 30 - MOT1VVVF Maintenance Indication

“Simulation” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox and Reset Counters
button are only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the motor is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual motor while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Number of Starts Number of starts of the motor

Run Time Time in hours that the motor has been running

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of starts and Run Time

Last Reset Time Date and Time the Number of Starts and Run Time was last reset
Note that there is an additional Parameter in the Aspect System that defines the Operators
ability to change the Setpoint on a stopped MOT1_VVVF on “BMI ModeControl”: Common.Set-
point.EnSPChngWhileStopped, which can be used in addition to the Start Speed SP settings
in the Maintenance Tab.

Parameter “ExternalStartSpeedSP” Drive Mode Default Setpoint Value if Drive not running

true any Parameter “StartSpeedSP”

false Seq or Cen Start Speed SP in Faceplate

Loc 0.0 (or nearest SP limit if outside)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 80/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3.7. Extended View

Figure 31 - MOT1VVVF Extended view

Extra Additional information for the MOT2_VVVF is structured in tabs. The available tabs and
a short description of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

SP Limits Setpoint limit settings

Dev Limits Deviation limit settings

FB3 Limits Actual Speed Supervision limit settings

4.3.3.8. SP Limits

Settings related to the Setpoint.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 81/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 32 - MOT1VVVF SP Limits Indication

Reference Table, Limits

Limits Description

Setpoint H Speed set point high limit

Setpoint L Speed set point low limit

Setpoint Speed Rate of change Limitation for the Setpoint

Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Auto Calculation sets the Stepsize to a multiple of 10 times 1 or 5 depend-
Step ent on the Range of the Setpoint

Inc/Dec Step If “Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Step” is not set, the Stepsize used for the
Inc/Dec Buttons and the Direct Entry Window can be set manually

Enable relative Limits for Entry If set, the Max Increase / Decrease Values are enforced
Window

Max Increase The Direct Entry Window’s high limit is set to the current Value plus the
Value given here

Max Decrease The Direct Entry Window’s low limit is set to the current Value minus the
Value given here

Use last Speed as Start Speed When this box is checked, the Start Speed SP tracks the Speed Setpoint if
the Motor is running

Start Speed SP Initial Set Point when starting the Motor

FB3 Run Limit Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to Step On fullfilled

FB3 Run Delay Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLim

Hysteresis Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond,

FB3 Off Lim Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to Step Off fullfilled

FB3 OffDelay Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLim


When the setpoint limits are changed from the faceplate, you must consider that these values
will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is performed and
the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT1_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 82/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3.9. Dev Limits

This Tab shows the Settings for the Deviation Alarm (MV – SP)

Figure 33 - MOT1VVVF Dev Limits Indication

Reference Table, Limits

Limits Description

Dev H Deviation high limit

Dev L Deviation low limit

Dev Hyst Deviation hysteresis

Dev Delay Deviation alarm time delay


When the deviation limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration
that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is
performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT1_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

4.3.3.10. IOStatus

Substatus for Foundation Fieldbus, S800 Field Devices, and the Status of the External Refer-
ence Setpoint in case LCC is used.

Figure 34 - MOT1VVVF IOStatus

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 83/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.3.3.11. FB3 Limits

Figure 35 - MOT1VVVF FB3 Limits Indication

Reference Table, FB3 Limits

Limits Description

FB3 Run Limit Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to Step On fullfilled

FB3 Run Delay Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLim

Hysteresis Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond,

FB3 Off Lim Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to Step Off fullfilled

FB3 OffDelay Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLim


When the FB3 limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration that
these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is per-
formed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT1_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

4.3.4. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar, SPIntpar)
can be configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in
the Control Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 84/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 85/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 36 - MOT1VVVF Faceplate Control Permission

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 86/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.4. Definition of Speed Supervision (FB3)


The speed supervision (FB3) checks that a certain minimum Speed is reached after a configu-
rable time during starting, to keep a minimum speed during running and that a certain maxi-
mum speed is reached after a configurable time during stopping of drive.

All Limits can be configured by Parameters on the Control Module or from the Operator Sta-
tion.

– MOT1_VVVF does not provide any information about the actual acceleration or decelera-
tion characteristics.

– The Speed curves need to be setup at the Drive control itself as per process requirement,
these settings are completely independent of parameters of MOT1_VVVF

Following bits are available on IO.Out bus and can be used in glue logic.

CM Data Type References, please, consult chapter Data Type Description

Name Data Type Attributes Description

30 DrvRunSpeedCond bool retain nosort Drive run above FB3RunSpeedLim after start and
can reset bellow hysteresis or stop drive

31 DrvOffSpeedCond bool retain nosort Drive stopped and actual speed is bellow
FB3OffSpeedLimit

32 DrvOffSpeedTrip bool retain nosort Drive FB3 OFF Trip supervision active

33 DrvRunOnSpeedSP bool retain nosort Drive reach speed setpoint once after start, re-
set within stop

34 FastRamp bool retain nosort Fast Ramp stopping bit, Updated by PCC Intlk,
Used for VVVF Drive

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 87/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.4.1. Available Parameters


CM Parameter References, please, consult chapter Parameter Description

No Name Data Initial Val Port Dir Description


Type

39 FB3Mode dint cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.FB3Mo no in IN: Enable FB3, 0=None,


de 1=FB3Run, 2=FB3Off,
16=FB3Off_EnTrip, binary combi-
nation allowed

40 ExternalFB3Run- dint cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Extern no in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=by


Limit alFB3RunLimit FPL, 1=by Application

41 FB3RunSpeedLi real 0.0 no in IN: Min Speed value as part of


m Run condition to Step On full-
filled

42 FB3RunSpeedTi time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time for


me FB3RunSpeedLim

43 FB3RunSpeedHy real 1.0 no in IN: Deviation Hysteresis in %,


st used to calculate
IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond

44 Exter- dint cBMI.MOT1_VVVF.Extern no in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=by


nalFB3OffLimit alFB3OffLimit FPL, 1=by Application

45 FB3OffSpeedLi real 100.0 no in IN: Min Speed Value as Part of


m Off condition to Step Off full-
filled

46 FB3OffSpeedTi time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time for


me FB3OffSpeedLim

47 FB3Txt string[3 cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for FB3, for


5] NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

10 GrpFB3Off- dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Go to next stop step: 0=wait


2 StepOverride till ActSpeed =<FB3OffSpeedLim,
1=FB3OffSpeedLim to be
ok/Warn/Trip, 2=Ignore Off-
SpeedLim and continue
For general information about speed parameters in FPL, please, consult chapter Second Ex-
tended View in this chapter.

Generally, with FB3Mode the speed supervision function on object can have no function,
warning or trip at starting, operation and stop condition.

FB3Mode is defined as dint in parameter list and supports the following options:

Description

FB3Mode = 0 None

FB3Mode = 1 FB3Run, Speed supervision at starting or during operation

FB3Mode = 2 FB3Off, Speed supervision at stopping

FB3Mode = 16 FB3Off_EnTrip, enable tripping on speed supervision at stopping


Binary combination is possible.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 88/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

As an example, by setting FB3Mode = 1+2 =3 following functionality is configured:

FB3Run, FB3Off

4.4.2. Run Speed Supervision


The drive should reach a certain value of speed in a certain time. To enable run supervision,
FB3Mode Parameter should be set to 1.

Following diagram is an example curve for a Drive that does not reach the configured speed
Limit in the configured Time.

Figure 37 - Run Speed Supervision

4.4.2.1. Run Speed Supervision as Warning

If the configured minimum speed FB3RunSpeedLim is greater than the minimum Setpoint
SetpL, the FB3 Supervision is treated as Warning.

This supervision is only applicable during start-up of drive and actual speed must reach the
speed limit to release IO.Out.Run. If the Speed is not reached during the Supervision Time
(FB3RunTime), a warning “Speed Supervision On” is generated and will be active until
FB3RunLimit is reached. Configure FB3Run as warning:

Condition> “FB3Run” enabled and FB3RunSpeedLim > SetpL

Figure 38 - Run Speed Supervision as Warning

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 89/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.4.2.2. Run Speed Supervision as Trip

If the configured minimum speed FB3RunSpeedLim is smaller than the minimum Setpoint
SetpL, the FB3 Supervision is treated as Trip.

This supervision is applicable during start-up and operation of drive and the actual speed
must reach the speed limit during the supervision time (FB3RunTime) to release IO.Out.Run,
otherwise a “Speed Supervision On” alarm is generated and the drive trips.

Once the drive reaches the speed limit after starting, the drive needs to keep the minimum
speed minus the hysteresis value, otherwise a “Speed Supervision Trip” is generated after the
supervision time (FB3RunTime) and the drive trips.

Condition: “FB3RunX” enabled and FB3RunSpeedLim ≤ SetpL

Figure 39 - Run Speed Supervision as Trip

4.4.3. Off Speed Supervision


The off-speed supervision checks that the drive speed is below a certain maximum Speed
limit after a configurable time during stopping of the drive.

To enable off speed supervision, FB3Mode must be configured as 2.

The drive group will, with configured speed off supervision, wait for the step condition in-
cluding the speed limit and continue with the next stop step only once the speed limit is
reached. This behavior can be configured with Parameter GrpFB3OffStepOverride.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 90/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Following Options are available with GrpFB3OffStepOverride

Description

GrpFB3OffStepOverride = 0 Group will wait till Actual Speed ≤ FB3OffSpeedLim till condition fulfilled or
end up by group sequence time out.

GrpFB3OffStepOverride = 1 Group will wait till SpeedSupervisionOff fulfilled or generate warning or


trip then group will pass to next stop step.

GrpFB3OffStepOverride = 2 Group is not taking care for this supervision and continue as normal.

Figure 40 - Off Speed Supervision

4.4.3.1. Off Speed Supervision as Warning

This supervision is only applicable during stopping of the drive. If the Drives actual speed al-
ways stays above the limit during the supervision time (FB3OffTime), a “Speed Supervision
Off” warning is generated.

The drive will stay ready for start with Speed Supervision.

4.4.3.2. Off Speed Supervision as Trip

If during stopping of the drive the actual speed is always above the limit during the speed su-
pervision time, the drive will trip with “Speed Supervision Off” alarm.

The drive will not be free for starting with active Speed Supervision Off trip.

Condition FB3Mode “FB3Off” and “En_FB3Off” enabled

Figure 41 - Off Speed Supervision as Trip

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 91/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4.4.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list.

4.4.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOT1_VVVF object the following message structure applies:
[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON] + [SPSUBMODE] + Blk: + [BLOCK
LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field / Local Control Box)

Out Motor is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Motor is in forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Run Motor is running

Off Motor is stopped

[STOP REASON] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Commans from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock from the group

IC Stopped due to IC interlock

IB1 Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Stopped due to IB2 interlock

IB3 Stopped due to IB3 interlock

IB4 Stopped due to IB4 interlock

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 92/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

IA Stopped due to IA interlock

PD Stopped due to Previous Drive

PCC-IC Stopped due to IC interlock via PCC

PCC-IB Stopped due to IB interlock via PCC

PCC-IA Stopped due to IA interlock via PCC

PCC-PD Stopped due to PD interlock via PCC

[SPSUBMODE] Description

SPExt Set Point external coming from IO.In.ExtSpeedRef

SPInt Set Point internal coming from the faceplate

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB3 IB3 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB4 IB4 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IA IA interlock is blocked in the faceplate

FB1 Feedback fault 1 is blocked in the faceplate

FB2 Feedback fault 2 is blocked in the faceplate

FB3 Feedback fault 3 is blocked in the faceplate

PD Previous Drive is blocked in the faceplate

4.4.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For MOT1_VVVF the following messages are
available to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

M2 M2Txt

M3 M3Txt

Local Stop LcbStopTxt

Contactor Fault FdBckTxt

Feedback 1 Fault FB1Txt

Feedback 2 Fault FB2Txt

Feedback 3 Fault FB3Txt


These text parameters can be changed in the motor control module from Control Builder.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 93/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FdBckTxt as well as FB1Txt and FB2Txt will
be added that gives the reason for the Alarm

Suffix Text Constant Reason

On cBMI.AE.FBFail_On_SuffixTxt FB not true after FBTime

Trip cBMI.AE.FBFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB goes false while running

Off cBMI.AE.FBFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB not false after FBTime

Frc cBMI.AE.FBFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB goes true while stopped

4.5. Application Examples


4.5.1. Weighfeeder closed loop control
Following Figure shows an example of program for a Mill feed flow control. The MOT1_VVVF is
used to control the Weighfeeder, where the SpeedSP is connected to the Flow Setpoint Refer-
ence of the Weighfeeder and the ActualSpeed is the Measured Flow (in tons/hour). In this Ex-
ample, the Feed to the Mill consisting of the Weighfeeder Input and the Rejects should be
constant, this is controlled by the PIDAdvCtrl Loop Control Block.

The Setpoint is going to two Weighfeeders, from which only one can be run at a Time. To con-
nect the Setpoint of the PIDAdvCtrl via LCC to the two Weighfeeders in parallel, the OUTCC
port of the PIDAdvCtrl block is connected via SplitRange Block to the External Setpoint Refer-
ence of the two MOT1_VVVF Blocks. The LCC can only be connected from one Block to an-
other, to connect 2 Weighfeeder, the SplitRange block needs to be used, and the Faceplate
parameters for OUT1 and OUT2 Min/Max can both be set to 0-100% for this case.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 94/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 42 - Weighfeeder closed loop control

Via the LCC Connection, the PIDAdvCtrl receives status Information from the Weighfeeder
(MOT1_VVVF). If the Weighfeeder is not in SPExt Mode or stopped, the PID output follows the
current Setpoint (Backtracking). Max/Min reached state is also indicated if the PID output is
not in the range of the Feeder Setpoint limits. The Backtracking state is visible on Faceplates
as colored bar above the SPInt button of the MOT1_VVVF and Navigation is possible in both
directions via links in the Faceplate, see the following figure:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 95/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 96/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Backtracking can be disabled in Manual Mode for the PIDAdvCtrl by deselecting the “Man
Backtracking” option on the Faceplate, to keep the Manual Setpoint in case of trip or prese-
lection change.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 97/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5. MOT2

5.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type MOT2 is used to control a motor with two directions (two speeds)
in a drive group or standalone.

In addition to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions are
supported for MOT2:

– Motor current indication and high limit warning supervision

– User definable Warning indication

– 3 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Overtemp, Overload & Availability

– 2 functional back process inputs with feedback time supervision for e.g. speed, pressure
or flow supervision. Pulsed feedback supported including actual Period time shown on the
Faceplate.

– 2 feedback run signals (one feedback for each direction)

– 2 Safety-, 2 Chain / Auto-, 2 Previous drive interlocks (always one per direction)

– 4 Process interlocks (direction independent)

– 2 of the in total 4 Process (run) interlocks, can be configured as start permissives

– All interlocks, except equipment interlocks, are direction related

– Totalisation and indication of run time (in hours) and number of starts.

5.2. Control
5.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 98/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 43 - MOT2 Block

5.2.2. Parameter description

No Name Data Initial Val Port Dir Description


Type

1 Name string 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the motor (allowed delimina-
[24] tors are "." and "-", no blanks ":" or ";" allowed)

2 Description string 'Descrip- yes in IN: Description text of the motor


[40] tion'

3 IO MOT2 default yes in_out IN/OUT: MOT2Data Variable


Data

4 Stw STW default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module STW
Data (startwarning)

5 Group Grp- default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module GROUP
DrvC (sequencer)
on

6 GrpStartXStep dint cBMI.DINT_ yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for direction X, if set to
0 0 -> not part of group sequence

7 GrpStartYStep dint cBMI.DINT_ yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for direction Y, if set to
0 0 -> not part of group sequence

8 GrpStop1Step dint cBMI.DINT_ yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 -> not
0 part of group sequence

9 GrpStop2Step dint cBMI.DINT_ yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 -> not
0 part of group sequence

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 99/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10 GrpStartXDelay time cBMI.Time0 yes in IN: Start delay for direction X when started
s from group sequence

11 GrpStartYDelay time cBMI.Time0 yes in IN: Start delay for direction Y when started
s from group sequence

12 GrpStop1Delay time cBMI.Time0 yes in IN: Stop delay 1 when stopped from group se-
s quence

13 GrpStop2Delay time cBMI.Time0 yes in IN: Stop delay 2 when stopped from group se-
s quence

14 PreSelectionX string cBMI.Empty yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to. Syn-
[50] _str tax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3 AND
NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

15 PreSelectionY string cBMI.Empty yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to. Syn-
[50] _str tax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3 AND
NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

16 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board


0

17 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board


0

18 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board


0

19 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board / Serial In-
0 terface

20 ME bool true yes left in_out IN true: Main control voltage distribution OK

21 M1 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 1, default "Over-


temp"

22 M2 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 2, default "Over-


load"

23 M3 bool true yes in IN true: MCC interface signal 3, default "Availa-


bility"

24 FdBckRunX bool yes left in_out IN: Run feedback signal direction X, default
"Contactor On". If no IO available
MOT2Data.Out.OrdX

25 FdBckRunY bool yes left in_out IN: Run feedback signal direction Y, default
"Contactor On". If no IO available
MOT2Data.Out.OrdY

26 FdBckTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Maximum delay time of contactor re-


sponse.

27 DirChgTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Down time when changing direction, if 0s,
down time is one task cycle

28 FB1 bool true yes left in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 1 from process
e.g. speed switch

29 FB1Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for functional backsignal


[35] _str FB1, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 100/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

30 FB1Mode dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: 0 = continuous signal; > 0 pulse time where
0 1=0.1s; 999999 = 99999.9s; -1 = cont. signal
with FB Opn Alarm

31 FB2 bool true yes left in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 2 from process
e.g. pressure switch

32 FB2Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for functional backsignal


[35] _str FB2, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

33 FB2Mode dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: 0 = continous signal; -1 = cont. signal with


0 FB Opn Alarm enabled

34 FBTime time cBMI.Time10 no in IN: Maximum delay time for FB1/2 response
s and HiCurrent response

35 LcbStartX bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: Start direction X (pulse) from field
LCB. Start = 1

36 LcbStartY bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: Start direction Y (pulse) from field
LCB. Start = 1

37 LcbStop bool true yes left in_out IN: Any stop command (stop, not remote..)
from field LCB. Stop = 0.

38 LcbRem bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the point of
control to Seq or Cen depending on config in
MOT2_LCB

39 LcbLoc bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the point of
control to Loc or Tst depending on config in
MOT2_LCB

40 LcbMaint bool false yes left in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depending on
user defined config in MOT2_LCB

41 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig, 1=POC LCB,
0 2=Hardwired LCB with LOC/REM DO, 3=POC
LCB with Stop on POC Chng, 4=POC CCR Start
and Rem Sig,

42 MC Re- default yes left in_out IN: Motor Current or Motor Power
alIO

43 MCNominal real 0 no in INIT: Nominal (rated) current of the motor

44 OrdX bool false yes out OUT: Start Order X. Output to contactor X (di-
rection X, forward).

45 OrdY bool false yes out OUT: Start Order Y. Output to contactor Y (di-
rection Y, reverse).

46 LocAlarmAck bool false no out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to reset alarms in
SCP's)

47 PrevDriveX bool true yes in IN true: Chain interlock for direction X "previ-
ous drive running"

48 PrevDriveXTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for chain interlock X with
[35] _str previous drive, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

49 IAXTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for chain / auto interlock
[35] _str IAX, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 101/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

50 PrevDriveY bool true yes in IN true: Chain interlock for direction Y "previ-
ous drive running"

51 PrevDriveYTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for chain interlock Y with
[35] _str previous drive, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

52 IAYTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for chain / auto interlock
[35] _str IAY, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

53 IBF bool false no in IN: IB Function. If true, IB3 and IB4 works as
start interlock.

54 IB1Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for interlock signal IB1, for
[35] _str NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

55 IB2Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for interlock signal IB2, for
[35] _str NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

56 IB3Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for interlock signal IB3, for
[35] _str NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

57 IB4Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for interlock signal IB4, for
[35] _str NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

58 ICXTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for safety interlock signal
[35] _str ICX (direction X), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

59 ICYTxt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for safety interlock signal
[35] _str ICY (direction Y), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

60 DirXTxt string cBMI.MOT2. no in IN: Description text for direction X (e.g. for-
[35] DirX_txt ward), for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

61 DirYTxt string cBMI.MOT2. no in IN: Description text for direction Y (e.g. re-
[35] DirY_txt verse), for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

62 StwCen bool cBMI.MOT.S no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning is trig-


twCen gered when started from Central/Sequence

63 StwField bool cBMI.MOT.S no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning is trig-


twField gered when started from field (from LCB)

64 StwDirChg bool false no in IN: If true, triggering of startwarning when


changing direction

65 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT.A no in INIT: 1= Disable IA in Man Mode if EnAuto, 8 =


utoMode Wait for next Trigger for Startup in Auto mode

66 EnAuto bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto mode
nAuto is activated on sequence start

67 EnSeq bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN true: Point of control Sequence enable


nSeq

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 102/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

68 EnCen bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN true: Point of control Central enable


nCen

69 EnLoc bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN true: Point of control Local enable


nLoc

70 EnMaint bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable


nMaint

71 EnFPLStopInAllModes bool cBMI.MOT.E no in IN true: If false stop from faceplate only works
nFPL- in POC Central
StopInAll-
Modes

72 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_ no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List, 4 =


0 Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 = Status, 32 =
Trend, 64 = Faceplate

73 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (process sec-


tion)

74 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.Ala no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio# (1=low-


rmTr est)

75 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.Int no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


erlockTr (1=lowest)

76 ModeTr bool cBMI.MOT.M no in IN true: True enables events on mode and


odeTr point of control change

77 StatusTr bool cBMI.MOT.S no in IN true: True enables events on status (on/off)


tatusTr change

78 IOStatTxt string cBMI.MOT.I no in IN: Description text for Input/Output board


[35] OS_txt failure (IOStatus), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

79 IOStat4Txt string cBMI.Empty no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure usally
[35] _str used for serial interface supervision, for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space

80 METxt string cBMI.MOT.M no in IN: Description text for control voltage distri-
[35] E_txt bution supervision, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

81 M1Txt string cBMI.MOT.M no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for NLS sup-
[35] 1_txt2 port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

82 M2Txt string cBMI.MOT.M no in IN: Description text for alarm M2, for NLS sup-
[35] 2_txt2 port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

83 M3Txt string cBMI.MOT.M no in IN: Description text for alarm M3, for NLS sup-
[35] 3_txt2 port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

84 LcbStopTxt string cBMI.MOT.L no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local Stopped",
[35] ocalStop_tx for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
t space in the text

85 FdBckTxt string cBMI.MOT.C no in INIT: Description text for alarm "Main Contac-
[35] ontac- tor Error", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
tor_al_txt fix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 103/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

86 MCTxt string cBMI.Logtxt no in IN: Description text for alarm "High Current",
[35] .HighLoad for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

87 WarningTxt string cBMI.MOT.W no in IN: Description text for warning (warning does
[35] arning_txt not stop the Motor), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

88 MCHiLim real 100 no in IN: Motor current high limit in % of nominal


(rated) current. If 0, alarming disabled

89 GrpRunXOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal direction X to


Group is set constant 1

90 GrpRunYOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal direction Y to


Group is set constant 1

91 GrpOff1Override bool false no in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal 1 to Group is


set constant 0

92 GrpOff2Override bool false no in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal 2 to Group is


set constant 0

93 GrpTripXOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip of direction X will not ini-
tiate an auto change over of the preselections

94 GrpTripYOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip of direction Y will not ini-
tiate an auto change over of the preselections

95 GrpRFSOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start won't be
forwarded to the Group and additionally, the
Group will skip the Step if not able to start

96 AlarmAck bool false no in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 104/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the MOT2 Control Module Type a Structured Data Type MOT2Data is available.
This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each motor in-
stance.

MOT2Data contains the four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel

MOT2Data; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In MOT2Input retain Input variables to the motor

2 Out MOT2Output retain Output variables from the motor

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/Interlock


from Input modules to motor

4 Process- PanelLinkCon- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


Panel sumer

MOT2Input; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSelX bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir X,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

2 PreSelY bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir Y,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

3 PreSelX- bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


StdBy standby for Dir X, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

4 PreSelY- bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


StdBy standby for Dir Y, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

5 EnSe- bool retain true IN true: a group start step dir X will not acti-
qStartX vate the motor till this signal is true

6 EnSe- bool retain true IN true: a group start step dir Y will not acti-
qStartY vate the motor till this signal is true

7 EnSe- bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not stop the
qStop motor till this signal is true, to be used is for
advanc

8 Se- bool retain hidden 0 Start command direction 1, or switch to Auto


qStartX (dir 1) if EnAuto = true

9 Se- bool retain hidden 0 Start command direction 2, or switch to Auto


qStartY (dir 2) if EnAuto = true

10 SeqStop bool retain hidden 0 Stop Command

11 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

12 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

13 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 105/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

14 ICX bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal direction 1, active in all


operation modes.

15 ICY bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal direction 2, active in all


operation modes.

16 IB1 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode

17 IB2 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local


mode

18 IB3 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode. Works as start intlk
if IBF=1

19 IB4 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local


mode. Works as start interlock if IBF =1

20 IAX bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction 1. Not included in


RFS signal.

21 IAY bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction 2. Not included in


RFS signal.

22 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning for the motor con-
trol, creates a warning if true, no stop of the
motor

MOT2Output; components

Name Data Type Attrib- Initial Description


utes Val

1 Auto bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in


sort Auto mode.

2 Seq bool retain no- Indication of point of operation SE-


sort Quence.

3 Cen bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in cen-
sort tral operation mode.

4 Loc bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in lo-
sort cal operation mode.

5 Maint bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in


sort maintenance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Out
sort Of Service

7 Trip bool retain no- TRIPped indication, can be used to start


sort a redundant drive, activated by
FdBckRun, M1, M2, M3, M4, FB1, FB2

8 RfsX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Ready
sort For Start for direction 1.

9 RfsY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Ready
sort For Start for direction 2.

10 NoIntX bool retain no- No INTerlocks direction 1. The drive is


sort ready for start and no IA interlock.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 106/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

11 NoIntY bool retain no- No INTerlocks direction 2. The drive is


sort ready for start and no IA interlock.

12 RunX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is run-
sort ning forward (dir 1), condition is: OrdX,
FdBckRunX, FB1, FB2

13 RunY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is run-
sort ning reverse (dir 2), condition is: OrdY,
FdBckRunY, FB1, FB2

14 Run bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is run-
sort dis- ning or changing its direction
playvalue

15 DirChg bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is


sort changing its direction

16 OrdX bool retain no- Output Start Order 1 forward (also ena-
sort bled during simulation)

17 OrdY bool retain no- Output Start Order 2 reverse (also ena-
sort bled during simulation)

18 StartCnt dint coldretain Accumulated no of starts


nosort

19 RuntimeCnt real coldretain Accumulated run time of motor


nosort

20 ALNumber dint retain no- Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
sort etc.)

21 ALPending bool retain no- Indication of Pending Alarm


sort

22 ALUnack bool retain no- Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm


sort

23 FieldStartXRe- bool retain no- Field Start Release X is true in case of


lease sort LOC is selected and startconditions for
the mode and direction are o.k.

24 Field- bool retain no- Field Start Release Y is true in case of


StartYRelease sort LOC is selected and startconditions for
the mode and directions are o.k.

25 ForcedRun bool retain no- Indicating forced run, motor started by


sort e.g. hardwired LCB

26 FdBckOffErr bool retain no- Main Contactor failed to open error


sort (Feedback Off Alarm present)

27 FB1PulseTime real retain no- Actual Time for 1 FB1 pulse in seconds
sort (e.g. speed switch)

28 FirstOrMaxAETag string[32] retain no- '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first
sort or highest Alarm or Event causing an
action on the Motor, Group or Valve

29 FirstOrMax- dint retain no- 0 Indication treatment of the first or


AEIndTr sort highest Alarm or Event causing an ac-
tion accroding to Minerals Library Alarm
Indication Standards

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 107/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

30 LastReset date_and_time coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in


System Time

31 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of


the Last Trip

32 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

PanelLinkConsumer; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Status dint retain nosort hidden Object Status Indication (Ready, Run,
NotRFS etc.)

2 Sta- dint retain nosort hidden Object Modes Indication (Seq, Cen,
tusModes Loc etc.)

3 Cmd dint retain nosort hidden 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers

4 Cmd- dint retain nosort hidden 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Con-
Modes sumers

5 Blink bool retain nosort hidden Enabling of Consumer Blinking

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Ready_Off 0 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Ready_Run 3 2 Central Mode 1

3 Run1 4 3 Local Mode 2

4 Run2 5 4 Auto Mode 3

5 NotRFS_Off 6 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 NotRFS_Run1 7 6 Out Of Service 9

7 NotRFS_Run2 B

8 Fault_Off 9

9 Fault_Run1 10

10 Fault_Run2 11

13 FaultNotRFS_Off 12

14 FaultNotRFS_Run1 13

15 FaultNotRFS_Run2 14

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Start1 0 1 SetCen 0

2 Start2 1 2 SetSeq 1

3 Stop 2 3 SetLoc 2

4 AlarmAck 7 4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 108/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.2.4. Project Constants


Name Data Type Default Value

1 cBMI.MOT2.DirX_txt string 'Direction X'

2 cBMI.MOT2.DirY_txt string 'Direction Y'

3 cBMI.MOT2.IndTr2NotDirDepending dint 0

4 cBMI.MOT2.IOS4StopMotor bool True

5 cBMI.MOT2.Run1txt string 'Run direction 1'

6 cBMI.MOT2.Run2txt string 'Run direction 2'

5.3. Operation
5.3.1. Graphic elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_MOT2Consumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information as


symbol.

VCO_MOT2FBTxt Object feedback information as text.

VCO_MOT2MCValue Displays the actual motor current.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation.

5.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on MOT2Faceplates.

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on MOT2Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Start MOT2, or restart after direc- Change control point to sequence:


tion change The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Stop MOT2 Change control point to central:


The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 109/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Direction control F/H Change control point to local


Preselection for direction 1(X) The object is controlled locally in the field
(Forward, High, Right or Fast). via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock catego-
ries are not active in Local

Direction control R/L Set mode to Auto


Preselection for direction 2(Y)
(Reverse, Low, Left or Slow).

Acknowledge alarm Set mode to Manual

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 110/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name & De-


scription

Warning & Alarm


Indication

Control Point
and Mode

Motor Status

Running Direc-
tion Indication

Extended Info

Figure 44 - MOT2 Default View

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT1

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 111/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 45 - MOT2 Normal View

Additional information for the MOT2 is structured in tabs. The available tabs and a short de-
scription of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual current value online trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

Maintenance Maintenance issues

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 112/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.3.2.3. Interlocks

Figure 46 - MOT2 Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

ICX Safety interlock for direction 1(X). Stops the motor when running in direction 1(X) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting in this direction as long as the inter-
lock is on.

ICY Safety interlock for direction 2(Y). Stops the motor when running in direction 2(Y) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting as in this direction long as the inter-
lock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB3 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1.

IB4 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1.

IAX Combined Auto-start and Chain If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts
interlock for direction 1(X). and Stops the Motor.
Not active in POC Local This can be used to start and stop an object by process once
the group or operator has put it to Auto.
If “true” motor starts or re-starts with direction 1(X)
If “false” motor stops, when running in direction 1(X)
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA
stops the motor and the motor must be started from Seq or
Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 113/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

IAY Combined Auto-start and Chain If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts
interlock for direction 2(Y). and Stops the Motor.
Not active in POC Local This can be used to start and stop an object by process once
the group or operator has put it to Auto.
If “true” motor starts or re-starts with direction 2(Y)
If “false” motor stops, when running in direction 2(Y)
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA
stops the motor and the motor must be started from Seq or
Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PDX Chain interlock, previous drive for Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
direction 1(X). as the interlock is on 1(X).
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PDY Chain interlock, previous drive for Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
direction 2(Y). as the interlock is on 2(Y).
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the interlock is
blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic element and on the Base
Control.
All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

5.3.2.4. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated). Inhibits
the M1..M3, LCB alarms below.

Direct Motor incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overtemp

– M2 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– M3 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– RUN Main Contactor on/off. Supervision for both directions. One delay timer.

– FB1 Supervision of “functional backsignal” e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period time
108ccor on the Faceplate.

– FB2 Supervision of “functional backsignal” e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 114/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

NB: FB1 and FB2 are overridden in Local Mode on LcbStart

Additionally, Direct Motor incorporates the following 2 Warnings (does not trip the motor):

– HighCurrent : Supervision of motor current. Can be indicated simultaneously


with one on the alarms/faults above.

– General Warning: User Defined Warning

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2/M3 signal input level can be changed to 0 for
normal status by project constants.

In total, 3 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, M2, M3, LCB, and RUN, FB1, FB2 not going on (Contactor On/Trip Alarm)

– one for RUN, FB1 and FB2 not going Off (Contactor Off/Frc Alarm)

– one for High Current Alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

Figure 47 - MOT2 Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor
(no alarm generated)

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm gener-
ated). Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Overtemp” as the alarm is on.

M2 MCC interface signal 2 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Overload” as the alarm is on.

M3 MCC interface signal 3 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Availability” as the alarm is on.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 115/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the
operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can al-
ways be done independent from the POC/mode. The motor will
always turn to manual mode.

FB Feedback motor running in either The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback time.
on of the directions 1 (X) or 2 (Y) The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via the Pa-
rameter List and is set per default to 2s.

FB1 Functional Back signal 1 The FB1 signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback
e.g. Speed Switch time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via
the Parameter List and is set per default to 10s.

FB2 Functional Back signal 2 Like FB1, but without support for Pulsed Signals
e.g. Pressure Switch

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.
All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on MOT2 graphic Element directly and on the MOT2Tag.

5.3.2.5. Trend

On-Line trend with actual current value

Show/Hide Grid

Zoom Out (Y-Axis)

Switch between ac-


tual current and ac-
tual current in % of
Record Time nominal

Figure 48 - MOT2 Trend

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 116/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 49 - MOT2 Value Indication on trend

5.3.2.6. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Motor will be started in Direction X


with Step No 30 in the Drive Group with
a delay of 5 seconds and only if pre-se-
lection P1, P2 or P3 is selected or
started in Direction Y with Step No 31
with the same delay when Pre-selection
P11 is selected.

This Motor will be stopped in Direction X


with Step No 1030 in the Drive Group
with a delay of 5 seconds or in Direction
Y with Step No 1031 with the same delay

Figure 50 - MOT2 Group Tab

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Start X Sequential start order of the mo- Start delay of the Preselection Condition
tor to direction 1(X) within the motor to direction e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
Drive Group 1(X) (P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Stop X Sequential stop order of the motor Stop delay of the n.a
from direction 1(X) within the motor from direc-
Drive Group tion 1(X)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 117/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Start Y Sequential start order of the mo- Start delay of the Preselection Condition
tor to direction 2(Y) within the motor to direction e.g P3 | P4
Drive Group 2(Y) P3 or P4

Stop Y Sequential stop order of the motor Stop delay of the n.a
from direction 2(Y) within the motor from direc-
Drive Group tion 2(Y)

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive n.a. n.a.


Group
When a motor is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

5.3.2.7. Maintenance

Figure 51 - MOT2 Maintenance

“Simulation” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox and Reset Counters button are
only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the motor is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual motor while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Drive to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Last Trip Reason The Reason of the Last Trip contains the Alarm, Interlock or PCC Text that was ac-
tive at the time of the last Trip

Last Trip Date Date and Time the Motor has tripped last

Number of Starts Number of starts of the motor

Run Time Time in hours that the motors has been running

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of starts and Run Time

Last Reset Time Date and Time at which Number of Starts and Run Time were last reset

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 118/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar) can be
configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in the Con-
trol Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

5.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list.

5.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOT2 object the following message structure applies:

[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field, Local Control Box)

Out Motor is Out of Service

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 119/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Motor is in Forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Starting Motor is starting

Run1 Motor is running in X direction or direction 1

Run2 Motor is running in X direction or direction 2

Run Motor is running. Message only possible under ForcedX and ForcedY condition at
the same time

Off Motor is stopped

[STOP REASON] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock X from the group

SQY Stopped due to Sequence Interlock Y from the group

ICX Stopped due to ICX interlock

ICY Stopped due to ICY interlock

IB1 Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Stopped due to IB2 interlock

IB3 Stopped due to IB3 interlock

IB4 Stopped due to IB4 interlock

IAX Stopped due to IAX interlock

IAY Stopped due to IAY interlock

PDX Stopped due to Previous Drive direction X

PDY Stopped due to Previous Drive direction Y

PCC-ICX Stopped due to IC interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-ICY Stopped due to IC interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IBX Stopped due to IB interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-IBY Stopped due to IB interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IAX Stopped due to IA interlock direction X via PCC

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 120/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

PCC-IAY Stopped due to IA interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-PDX Stopped due to PD interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-PDY Stopped due to PD interlock direction Y via PCC

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB3 IB3 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB4 IB4 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAX IAX interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAY IAY interlock is blocked in the faceplate

FB1 Feedback fault 1 is blocked in the faceplate

FB2 Feedback fault 2 is blocked in the faceplate

PDX Previous Drive X is blocked in the faceplate

PDY Previous Drive Y is blocked in the faceplate

5.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For MOT2 the following messages are availa-
ble to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

M2 M2Txt

M3 M3Txt

Local Stop LcbStopTxt

Contactor Fault FdBckTxt

Feedback 1 Fault FB1Txt

Feedback 2 Fault FB2Txt


These text parameters can be changed in the motor control module from Control Builder.

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FdBckTxt as well as FB1Txt and FB2Txt will
be added that gives the reason for the Alarm.

Suffix Text Constant Reason

On cBMI.AE.FBFail_On_SuffixTxt FB not true after FBTime

Trip cBMI.AE.FBFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB goes false while running

Off cBMI.AE.FBFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB not false after FBTime

Frc cBMI.AE.FBFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB goes true while stopped

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 121/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 122/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6. MOT2_VVVF

6.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type MOT2_VVVF is used to control a motor with two directions variable
speed drives in a drive group or standalone.

In addition to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions are
supported for MOT2_VVVF:

– Motor current indication and high limit warning supervision

– User definable Warning indication

– Motor speed indication

– Actual Speed and Speed setpoint will generate error control when quality is Bad or Uncer-
tain

– Speed Setpoint, independent for each direction, coming from the corresponding drive
group, control loop (LCC) or application (External Setpoint) or from the Operator Station
or Process Panel (Internal Setpoint)

– Speed set point low and high limitation, Speed Deviation Alarm

– 3 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Overtemp, Overload & Availability

– 2 functional back process inputs with feedback time supervision for e.g. speed, pressure
or flow supervision. Pulsed feedback supported including actual Period time shown on the
Faceplate.

– 2 feedback run signals (one feedback for each direction)

– 2 Safety-, 2 Chain / Auto-, 2 Previous drive interlocks (always one per direction)

– 4 Process interlocks (direction independent)

– 2 of the in total 4 Process (run) interlocks, can be configured as start permissives

– All interlocks, except equipment interlocks, are direction related

– Totalisation and indication of run time (in hours) and number of starts.

– Supervision of the Actual Speed feedback during Start and Stop as configurable condition
for alarming and feedback to the drive group

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 123/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.2. Control
6.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

Figure 52 - MOT2VVVF Block

6.2.2. Parameter Description

No Name Data Type Initial Val Por Dir Description


t

1 Name string 'Name' 1 in INIT: Tag name of the motor (allowed de-
liminators are "." and "-", no blanks ":" or ";"
allowed)

2 Description string 'Description' 1 in IN: Description text of the motor

3 IO MOT2VVVFData default 1 in_out IN/OUT: MOT2VVVFData Variable

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 124/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4 SPExtRefX LoopCon- default no in IN(OUT): External Setpoint Connection


trolData from Controller

5 SPExtRefY LoopCon- default no in IN(OUT): External Setpoint Connection


trolData from Controller

6 Stw STWData default 1 in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module


STW (startwarning)

7 Group GrpDrvCon default 1 in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module


GROUP (sequencer)

8 GrpStartXStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 1 in IN: Start step no 1..999 for direction X, if


set to 0 -> not part of group sequence

9 GrpStartYStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 1 in IN: Start step no 1..999 for direction Y, if


set to 0 -> not part of group sequence

10 GrpStop1Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 1 in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->


not part of group sequence

11 GrpStop2Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 1 in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->


not part of group sequence

12 GrpStartXDelay time cBMI.Time0s 1 in IN: Start delay for direction X when


started from group sequence

13 GrpStartYDelay time cBMI.Time0s 1 in IN: Start delay for direction Y when


started from group sequence

14 GrpStop1Delay time cBMI.Time0s 1 in IN: Stop delay 1 when stopped from group
sequence

15 GrpStop2Delay time cBMI.Time0s 1 in IN: Stop delay 2 when stopped from group
sequence

16 PreSelectionX string cBMI.Empty_ 1 in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.


str Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3
AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR.
No Spaces allowed.

17 PreSelectionY string cBMI.Empty_ 1 in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.


str Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3
AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR.
No Spaces allowed.

18 SPIntPar SpeedPara- default 0 in_out IN/OUT: Interaction Parameter for Speed


mIntAct settings on Faceplate

19 ExternalSPIntPar bool false 1 in INIT: External Speed Setpoint and Limit


(e.g. from DriveGroup) connected to
SPIntPar Parameter

20 SpeedSp RealIO 1 out IN/OUT: Output for Speed Setpoint con-


nected to VVVF drive, use an AOX but not
an AOS on this output

21 ExternalSPLimits dint cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: SetpH and SetpL Limits, 0=None,


VVVF.Extern 1=SetpXH, 2=SetpXL, 4=SetpYH, 8=SetpYL
alSPLimits Controlled from Application, binary com-
binations allowed e.g. X H

22 SetpXH real 100 0 in COLD INIT: initial SetpointX high limit

23 SetpXL real 0 0 in COLD INIT: initial SetpointX low limit

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 125/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

24 SetpYH real 100 0 in COLD INIT: initial SetpointY high limit

25 SetpYL real 0 0 in COLD INIT: initial SetpointY low limit

26 External- dint cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Control StartSpeedSP, 0=None, 1=X ,


StartSpeedSP VVVF.Extern 2=Y , 3=X&Y by Application
al-
StartSpeedS
P

27 StartSpeedSPX real 0 0 in COLD INIT: initial Start Speed SetpointX

28 StartSpeedSPY real 0 0 in COLD INIT: initial Start Speed SetpointY

29 ActualSpeed RealIO 1 in_out IN/OUT: Input for Actual Speed connected


to the VVVF drive

30 RFSonSigErr bool FALSE 0 in IN False: If true, the drive remains Ready


for Start even if SpeedSp Signal Error is
active

31 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

32 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

33 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

34 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board / Se-


rial Interface

35 ME bool true 1 in_out IN true: Main control voltage distribution


OK

36 M1 bool true 1 in IN true: MCC interface signal 1, default


"Overtemp"

37 M2 bool true 1 in IN true: MCC interface signal 2, default


"Overload"

38 M3 bool true 1 in IN true: MCC interface signal 3, default


"Availability"

39 FdBckRunX bool 1 in_out IN: Run feedback signal direction X, de-


fault "Contactor On". If no IO available
MOT2VVVFData.Out.OrdX

40 FdBckRunY bool 1 in_out IN: Run feedback signal direction Y, default


"Contactor On". If no IO available
MOT2VVVFData.Out.OrdY

41 FdBckTime time cBMI.Time2s 0 in IN: Maximum delay time of contactor re-


sponse.

42 DirChgTime time cBMI.Time2s 0 in IN: Down time when changing direction, if


0s, down time is one task cycle

43 FB1 bool true 1 in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 1 from pro-


cess e.g. speed switch

44 FB1Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for functional backsig-


str nal FB1, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

45 FB1Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: 0 = continuous signal; > 0 pulse time


where 1=0.1s; 999999 = 99999.9s; -1 =
cont. signal with FB Opn Alarm

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 126/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

46 FB2 bool true 1 in_out IN true: Functional backsignal 2 from pro-


cess e.g. pressure switch

47 FB2Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for functional backsig-


str nal FB2, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

48 FB2Mode dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: 0 = continous signal; -1 = cont. signal


with FB Opn Alarm enabled

49 FBTime time cBMI.Time10 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for FB1/2 re-
s sponse and HiCurrent response

50 FB3Mode dint cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Enable FB3, 0=None, 1=FB3RunX,


VVVF.FB3Mo 2=FB3OffX, 4=FB3RunY, 8=FB3OffY,
de 16=FB3OffX_EnTrip, 32=FB3OffY_EnTrip,
binary com

51 ExternalFB3RunLimit dint cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=None, 1=X , 2=Y


VVVF.Extern , 3=X&Y by Application
alFB3Run-
Limit

52 FB3RunSpeedLimX real 0.0 0 in IN: Min Speed value as part of Run condi-
tion to Step On fullfilled for DirX

53 FB3RunSpeedTimeX time cBMI.Time10 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


s FB3RunSpeedLimX

54 FB3RunSpeedLimY real 0.0 0 in IN: Min Speed value as part of Run condi-
tion to Step On fullfilled for DirY

55 FB3RunSpeedTimeY time cBMI.Time10 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


s FB3RunSpeedLimY

56 FB3RunSpeedHyst real 1.0 0 in IN: Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to cal-


culate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond, same
param for X and Y

57 ExternalFB3OffLimit dint cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=None, 1=X , 2=Y


VVVF.Extern , 3=X&Y by Application
alFB3OffLimi
t

58 FB3OffSpeedLimX real 100.0 0 in IN: Min Speed Value as Part of Off condi-
tion to Step Off fullfilled for DirX

59 FB3OffSpeedTimeX time cBMI.Time10 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


s FB3OffSpeedLimX

60 FB3OffSpeedLimY real 100.0 0 in Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition


to Step On fullfilled for DirY

61 FB3OffSpeedTimeY time cBMI.Time10 0 in Maximum delay time for


s FB3OffSpeedLimY

62 FB3Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for FB3, for NLS sup-
str port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

63 LcbStartX bool false 1 in_out IN pulse: Start direction X (pulse) from


field LCB. Start = 1

64 LcbStartY bool false 1 in_out IN pulse: Start direction Y (pulse) from


field LCB. Start = 1

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 127/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

65 LcbStop bool true 1 in_out IN: Any stop command (stop, not remote..)
from field LCB. Stop = 0.

66 LcbRem bool false 1 in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the


point of control to Seq or Cen depending
on config in MOT2_VVVF_LCB

67 LcbLoc bool false 1 in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the


point of control to Loc or Tst depending
on config in MOT2_VVVF_LCB

68 LcbMaint bool false 1 in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depending


on user defined config in MOT2_VVVF_LCB

69 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig, 1=POC
LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with LOC/REM DO,
3=POC LCB with Stop on POC Chng,
4=POC CCR Start and Rem Sig,

70 LcbSpeedInc bool FALSE 1 in_out IN false: Increase speed signal from field
LCB

71 LcbSpeedDec bool FALSE 1 in_out IN false: Decrease speed signal from field
LCB

72 LcbSpeed real 1 0 in IN 1: Change rate for Speed Setpoint by


LCB increase/decrease engineering unit /
Normal task time

73 MC RealIO default 1 in_out IN: Motor Current or Motor Power

74 MCNominal real 0 0 in INIT: Nominal (rated) current of the motor

75 OrdX bool false 1 out OUT: Start Order X. Output to contactor X


(direction X, forward).

76 OrdY bool false 1 out OUT: Start Order Y. Output to contactor Y


(direction Y, reverse).

77 LocAlarmAck bool false 0 out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to reset
alarms in SCP's)

78 PrevDriveX bool true 1 in IN true: Chain interlock for direction X


"previous drive running"

79 PrevDriveXTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for chain interlock X


str with previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

80 IAXTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for chain / auto inter-
str lock IAX, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

81 PrevDriveY bool true 1 in IN true: Chain interlock for direction Y


"previous drive running"

82 PrevDriveYTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for chain interlock Y


str with previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

83 IAYTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for chain / auto inter-
str lock IAY, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

84 IBF bool false 0 in IN: IB Function. If true, IB3 and IB4 works
as start interlock.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 128/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

85 IB1Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for interlock signal


str IB1, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

86 IB2Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for interlock signal


str IB2, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

87 IB3Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for interlock signal


str IB3, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

88 IB4Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for interlock signal


str IB4, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

89 ICXTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for safety interlock


str signal ICX (direction X), for NLS support
use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

90 ICYTxt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for safety interlock


str signal ICY (direction Y), for NLS support
use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

91 DirXTxt string cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Description text for direction X (e.g.


VVVF.DirX_tx forward), for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
t prefix and no space in the text

92 DirYTxt string cBMI.MOT2_ 0 in IN: Description text for direction Y (e.g. re-
VVVF.DirY_tx verse), for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ pre-
t fix and no space in the text

93 StwCen bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning is


VVVF.StwCe triggered when started from Central/Se-
n quence

94 StwField bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning is


VVVF.StwFiel triggered when started from field (from
d LCB)

95 StwDirChg bool false 0 in IN: If true, triggering of startwarning


when changing direction

96 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT.Au no in INIT: 1= Disable IA in Man Mode if EnAuto,


toMode 8 = Wait for next Trigger for Startup in
Auto mode

97 EnAuto bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto


VVVF.EnAuto mode is activated on sequence start

98 EnSeq bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: Point of control Sequence enable


VVVF.EnSeq

99 EnCen bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: Point of control Central enable


VVVF.EnCen

100 EnLoc bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: Point of control Local enable


VVVF.EnLoc

101 EnMaint bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable


VVVF.EnMain
t

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 129/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

102 EnFPLStopInAll- bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: If false stop from faceplate only
Modes VVVF.EnFPLS works in POC Central
topInAll-
Modes

103 EnSPExt bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN false: Mode external speed setpoint


VVVF.EnSPEx (e.g. from PID) enable
t

104 EnSPInt bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: Mode internal speed setpoint


VVVF.EnSPIn (from faceplate) enable
t

105 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List, 4


= Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 = Status,
32 = Trend, 64 = Faceplate

106 Class dint 1 0 in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (process


section)

107 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.Alar 0 in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


mTr (1=lowest)

108 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.Inte 0 in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


rlockTr (1=lowest)

109 DevTr dint cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in INIT: Alarm treatment for deviation: -1 no


VVVF.DevTr AE; 0 = Event ; 1,2,3 = ALPrio# (1=lowest)

110 ModeTr bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: True enables events on mode and
VVVF.ModeT point of control change
r

111 StatusTr bool cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN true: True enables events on status


VVVF.Status (on/off) change
Tr

112 IOStatTxt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for Input/Output


VVVF.IOS_txt board failure (IOStatus), for NLS support
use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

113 IOStat4Txt string cBMI.Empty_ 0 in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure
str usally used for serial interface supervision,
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space

114 METxt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for control voltage
VVVF.ME_txt distribution supervision, for NLS support
use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

115 M1Txt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for NLS
VVVF.M1_txt support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

116 M2Txt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for alarm M2, for NLS
VVVF.M2_txt support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

117 M3Txt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for alarm M3, for NLS
VVVF.M3_txt support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 130/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

118 LcbStopTxt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for alarm "Local
VVVF.LocalSt Stopped", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
op_txt prefix and no space in the text

119 FdBckTxt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in INIT: Description text for alarm "Main Con-
VVVF.Contac tactor Error", for NLS support use
tor_al_txt ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

120 MCTxt string cBMI.Logtxt. 0 in IN: Description text for alarm "High Cur-
HighLoad rent", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

121 WarningTxt string cBMI.MOT1_ 0 in IN: Description text for warning (warning
VVVF.Warnin does not stop the Motor), for NLS support
g_txt use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

122 MCHiLim real 100 0 in IN: Motor current high limit in % of nomi-
nal (rated) current. If 0, alarming disabled

123 GrpRunXOverride bool false 0 in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal direction


X to Group is set constant 1

124 GrpRunYOverride bool false 0 in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal direction


Y to Group is set constant 1

125 GrpOff1Override bool false 0 in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal 1 to Group


is set constant 0

126 GrpOff2Override bool false 0 in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal 2 to Group


is set constant 0

127 GrpTripXOverride bool false 0 in IN false: If true, a trip of direction X will


not initiate an auto change over of the
preselections

128 GrpTripYOverride bool false 0 in IN false: If true, a trip of direction Y will


not initiate an auto change over of the
preselections

129 GrpFB3OffStepOver- dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Go to next stop step: 0=wait till
ride ActSpeed =<FB3OffSpeedLim,
1=FB3OffSpeedLim to be ok/Warn/Trip,
2=Ignore OffSpeedLim and continue

130 GrpRFSOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start won't
be forwarded to the Group and addition-
ally, the Group will skip the Step if not able
to start

131 AlarmAck bool false 0 in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

132 TrackMan bool TRUE 0 in IN: true: Internal setpoint tracks the exter-
nal speed setpoint in case the drive is in
SPExt mode

6.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the MOT2_VVVF Control Module Type a Structured Data Type MOT2VVVFData
is available. This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each
motor instance.

MOT2VVVFData contains the four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 131/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

MOT2VVVFData; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Description


Val

1 In MOT2VVVFInput retain Input variables to the motor

2 Out MOT2VVVFOutput retain Output variables from the motor

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, Priori-


tyCommand/Interlock from Input
modules to VVVF

4 ProcessPanel PanelLinkConsAndSP retain Interface from / to ProcessPanel

MOT2VVVFInput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSelX bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir X,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

2 PreSelY bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir Y,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

3 PreSelXStdBy bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


standby for Dir X, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

4 PreSelYStdBy bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


standby for Dir Y, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

5 EnSeqStartX bool retain true IN true: a group start step dir X will not acti-
vate the motor till this signal is true

6 EnSeqStartY bool retain true IN true: a group start step dir Y will not acti-
vate the motor till this signal is true

7 EnSeqStop bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not stop the
motor till this signal is true, to be used is for
advanc

8 SeqStartX bool retain hidden 0 Start command direction 1, or switch to


Auto (dir 1) if EnAuto = true

9 SeqStartY bool retain hidden 0 Start command direction 2, or switch to


Auto (dir 2) if EnAuto = true

10 SeqStop bool retain hidden 0 Stop Command

11 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

12 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

13 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

14 ICX bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal direction 1, active in


all operation modes.

15 ICY bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal direction 2, active in


all operation modes.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 132/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

16 IB1 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode

17 IB2 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local


mode

18 IB3 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode. Works as start
intlk if IBF=1

19 IB4 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local


mode. Works as start interlock if IBF =1

20 IAX bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction 1. Not included in


RFS signal.

21 IAY bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction 2. Not included in


RFS signal.

22 SetSpInt bool retain hidden IN pulse: Set operation mode to Internal set-
point output reference from FPL

23 SetSpExt bool retain hidden IN pulse: Set operation mode to external


setpoint output reference from e.g. PID loop

24 ExtSpeedRefX real retain 0.0 IN: EXTernal Speed REFerence X for the drive
when e.g. controlled by a PID loop.

25 ExtSpeedRefY real retain 0.0 IN: EXTernal Speed REFerence Y for the drive
when e.g. controlled by a PID loop.

26 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning for the motor con-
trol, creates a warning if true, no stop of the
motor

MOT2VVVFOutput; components

Name Data Type Attrib- Init. Description


utes Val

1 Auto bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in Auto
sort mode.

2 Seq bool retain no- Indication of point of operation SEQuence.


sort

3 Cen bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in central op-
sort eration mode.

4 Loc bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in local oper-
sort ation mode.

5 Maint bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in mainte-
sort nance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Out Of Ser-
sort vice

7 Trip bool retain no- TRIPped indication, can be used to start a re-
sort dundant drive, activated by FdBckRun, M1, M2,
M3, M4, FB1, FB2, FB3(if configured for Trip)

8 RfsX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Ready For
sort Start for direction 1.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 133/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9 RfsY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Ready For
sort Start for direction 2.

10 NoIntX bool retain no- No INTerlocks direction 1. The drive is ready


sort for start and no IA interlock.

11 NoIntY bool retain no- No INTerlocks direction 2. The drive is ready


sort for start and no IA interlock.

12 RunX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is running for-
sort ward (dir 1), condition is: OrdX, FdBckRunX,
FB1, FB2, FB3X(if configured for RunLimit)

13 RunY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is running re-
sort verse (dir 2), condition is: OrdY, FdBckRunY,
FB1, FB2, FB3Y(if configured for RunLimit)

14 Run bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is running or
sort dis- changing its direction
playvalue

15 DirChg bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is changing its
sort direction

16 OrdX bool retain no- Output Start Order 1 forward (also enabled
sort during simulation)

17 OrdY bool retain no- Output Start Order 2 reverse (also enabled
sort during simulation)

18 StartCnt dint coldretain Accumulated no of starts


nosort

19 RuntimeCnt real coldretain Accumulated run time of motor


nosort

20 SetpointSpeed real retain no- Setpoint Speed connected to VVVF drive


sort

21 SpExt bool retain no- Signal indicating that the VVVF is controlled
sort by an external speed reference

22 Deviation real retain no- Actual Speed Deviation in %


sort

23 DevH bool retain no- Actual Deviation > High alarm limit
sort

24 DevL bool retain no- Actual Deviation < Low alarm limit
sort

25 DrvRunSpeedCond bool retain no- Drive run above FB3RunSpeedLim after start
sort and can reset bellow hysteresis or stop drive

26 DrvOffSpeedCond bool retain no- Drive stopped and actual speed is bellow
sort FB3OffSpeedLimit

27 DrvOffSpeedTrip bool retain no- Drive FB3 OFF Trip supervision active
sort

28 DrvRunOnSpeedSP bool retain no- Drive reach speed setpoint once after start,
sort reset within stop

29 ALNumber dint retain no- Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2, FB3
sort etc.)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 134/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO N S U M E R O B J EC TS

30 ALPending bool retain no- Indication of Pending Alarm


sort

31 ALUnack bool retain no- Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm


sort

32 FieldStartXRelease bool retain no- Field Start Release X is true in case of LOC is
sort selected and startconditions for the mode and
direction are o.k.

33 FieldStartYRelease bool retain no- Field Start Release Y is true in case of LOC is
sort selected and startconditions for the mode and
directions are o.k.

34 ForcedRun bool retain no- Indicating forced run, motor started by e.g.
sort hardwired LCB

35 FdBckOffErr bool retain no- Main Contactor failed to open error (Feedback
sort Off Alarm present)

36 FB1PulseTime real retain no- Actual Time for 1 FB1 pulse in seconds (e.g.
sort speed switch)

37 SigErr bool retain no- Signal Error summing SpeedSetpoint and Ac-
sort tualSpeed Sig Error Status

38 FirstOrMaxAETag string[32] retain no- '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first or
sort highest Alarm or Event causing an action on
the Motor, Group or Valve

39 FirstOrMax- dint retain no- 0 Indication treatment of the first or highest


AEIndTr sort Alarm or Event causing an action accroding to
Minerals Library Alarm Indication Standards

40 LastReset date_and_time coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in System


Time

41 FastRamp bool retain no- 0 Fast Ramp stopping bit, Updated by PCC Intlk,
sort Used for VVVF Drive

42 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of the Last


Trip

43 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

SpeedParamIntAct; components

Name Data Attributes Initial Description


Type Val

1 SetSPExt bool retain 0 Set Setpoint External Mode

2 SetSPInt bool retain 0 Set Setpoint Internal Mode

3 Increase bool retain nosort false Increase output signal by IncDecStep, only
allowed in SPInt Mode

4 Decrease bool retain nosort false Decrease output signal by IncDecStep, only
allowed in SPInt Mode

5 IncDecStepX real coldretain no- 1.0 Stepsize for Increase and Decrease com-
sort mands for X

6 AutoIncDecStepX bool coldretain no- true enable automatic Calculation of IncDecStep


sort from Signal Range for X

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 135/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7 IncDecStepY real coldretain no- 1.0 Stepsize for Increase and Decrease com-
sort mands for Y

8 AutoIncDecStepY bool coldretain no- true enable automatic Calculation of IncDecStep


sort from Signal Range for Y

9 MaxChangeIncX real coldretain no- 100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in positive di-
sort rection (only used in Graphics)

10 MaxChangeDecX real coldretain no- -100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in negative di-
sort rection (only used in Graphics)

11 EnableChangeCtrlX bool coldretain no- false Enable MaxChangeInc / Dec Limits in DEW
sort (only used in Graphics)

12 MaxChangeIncY real coldretain no- 100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in positive di-
sort rection (only used in Graphics)

13 MaxChangeDecY real coldretain no- -100.0 Max Change allowed for DEW in negative di-
sort rection (only used in Graphics)

14 EnableChangeCtrlY bool coldretain no- false Enable MaxChangeInc / Dec Limits in DEW
sort (only used in Graphics)

15 SetpXH real coldretain no- 100.0 High limit for speed setpointX
sort

16 SetpXL real coldretain no- 0.0 Low limit for speed setpointX
sort

17 SetpYH real coldretain no- 100.0 High limit for speed setpointY
sort

18 SetpYL real coldretain no- 0.0 Low limit for speed setpointY
sort

19 SetpSpeedX real coldretain no- 100.0 Max Change Speed of SetpointX in %/s
sort

20 SetpSpeedY real coldretain no- 100.0 Max Change Speed of SetpointY in %/s
sort

21 StartSpeedSPX real coldretain no- 0.0 Speed SetpointX when starting the Drive
sort

22 StartSpeedSPY real coldretain no- 0.0 Speed SetpointY when starting the Drive
sort

23 UseLastSpeedAs- bool coldretain no- false Overwrite StartSpeedSPX with current Set-
StartSpeedX sort point

24 UseLastSpeedAs- bool coldretain no- false Overwrite StartSpeedSPY with current Set-
StartSpeedY sort point

25 SetpointX real retain nosort 0 Man setpointX, reference value when in man

26 SetpointY real retain nosort 0 Man setpointY, reference value when in man

27 DevHLim real coldretain no- 100.0 Limit for Deviation high alarm in %
sort

28 DevLLim real coldretain no- -100.0 Limit for Deviation low alarm in %
sort

29 DevHyst real coldretain no- 1.0 Deviation hysteresis in %


sort

30 DevAlarmDelay time coldretain no- 10s Time delay for the speed deviation supervi-
sort sion

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 136/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

31 FB3RunSpeedLimX real coldretain 0 Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to


Step On fullfilled for DirX

32 FB3RunSpeedTimeX time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLimX

33 FB3RunSpeedLimY real coldretain 0 Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to


Step On fullfilled for DirY

34 FB3RunSpeedTimeY time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLimY

35 FB3RunSpeedHyst real coldretain 1.0 Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to calculate


IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond, same param for X
and Y

36 FB3OffSpeedLimX real coldretain 100.0 Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to
Step Off fullfilled for DirX

37 FB3OffSpeedTimeX time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLimX

38 FB3OffSpeedLimY real coldretain 100.0 Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to
Step On fullfilled for DirY

39 FB3OffSpeedTimeY time coldretain 10s Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLimY

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 137/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

PanelLinkConsAndSP; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Description


Val

1 Status dint retain nosort hidden Object Status

2 Sta- dint retain nosort hidden Object Modes


tusModes

3 Cmd dint retain nosort hidden 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers

4 CmdModes dint retain nosort hidden 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Con-
sumers

5 Blink bool retain nosort hidden Enabling of Consumer Blinking

6 Setpoint real retain nosort hidden Setpoint from Panel to Consumer

7 MeasValue real retain nosort hidden Measured Value from Consumer to


Panel

8 EnSPField bool retain nosort hidden Enabling of SP Input Field

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Ready_Off 0 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Ready_Run 3 2 Central Mode 1

3 Run1 4 3 Local Mode 2

4 Run2 5 4 Auto Mode 3

5 NotRFS_Off 6 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 NotRFS_Run1 7 6 External Mode 5

7 NotRFS_Run2 B 7 ExternalCen Mode 6

8 Fault_Off 9 8 ExtCen Mode 7

9 Fault_Run1 10 9 AutoSPExt Mode 8

10 Fault_Run2 11 10 Out Of Service 9

13 FaultNotRFS_Off 12

14 FaultNotRFS_Run1 13

15 FaultNotRFS_Run2 14

6.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRefX / SPExtRefY LCC


The MOT2_VVVF supports LCC for the SPExt Mode external Reference, separately for each Di-
rection. Please refer to the 03 Loop Objects Manual for a description of this Datatype.

6.2.4.1. Backtracking

Set if the MOT2_VVVF is not running in in the respective direction in SPExt Mode, is Inter-
locked or Tripped. If running in the correct direction, the backtracking value is the current
Setpoint reference, otherwise the backtracking value is set to Start Speed SP.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 138/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.2.4.2. Min Reached / Max Reached

Set when the MOT2_VVVF internal configured Limits are reached. The SpeedSP Output Pa-
rameter Value will always be kept inside the Limits independent of the Backtracking Support
of the Block connected via LCC.

6.2.4.3. Communication Error

In case SPExtRef is connected from a Communication Variable and there is a Communication


Error, the MOT2_VVVF changes to SPInt Mode (Internal Setpoint Reference). If EnSPInt is
false, the MOT2_VVVF will stay in SPExt and the IO.In.ExtSpeedRef is used instead, therefore
the respective IO.In.ExtSpeedRef has to be set to the required ISP Value.

6.2.5. Project Constants


Name Default Value Data Type

1 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.DirX_txt string 'Direction X'

2 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.DirY_txt string 'Direction Y'

3 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.EnFB3OffX dword 16#2

4 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.EnFB3OffY dword 16#8

5 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.EnFB3RunX dword 16#1

6 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.EnFB3RunY dword 16#4

7 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalFB3LimitX dword 16#1

8 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalFB3LimitY dword 16#2

9 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalFB3OffLimit dint 0

10 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalFB3RunLimit dint 0

11 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalSPLimits dint 0

12 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalSPLimitsXH dword 16#1

13 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalSPLimitsXL dword 16#2

14 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalSPLimitsYH dword 16#4

15 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalSPLimitsYL dword 16#8

16 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalStartSpeedSP dint 0

17 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalStartSpeedSPX dword 16#1

18 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalStartSpeedSPY dword 16#2

19 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.FB3Mode dint 0

20 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.FB3OffX_EnTrip dword 16#10

21 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.FB3OffY_EnTrip dword 16#20

22 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.FB3Txt string 'Speed Super-


vision'

23 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.IndTr2NotDirDepending dint 0

24 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.IOS4StopMotor bool True

25 cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.RFSonSigErr bool false

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 139/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3. Operation
6.3.1. Graphic Elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_MOT2_VVVFConsumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm infor-


mation as symbol.

VCO_MOT2_VVVFCtrl Displays object control information. Allows direct en-


try of set-point..

VCO_MOT2_VVVFFBTxt Object feedback information as text.

VCO_MOT2_VVVFMCValue Displays the actual motor current.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 140/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on MOT2VVVF Faceplates

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on MOT2_VVVF Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Start MOT2_VVVF, or restart after di- Change control point to sequence:


rection change The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Stop MOT2_VVVF Change control point to central:


The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

Direction control F/H Change control point to local


Preselection for direction 1(X) The object is controlled locally in the field
(Forward, High, Right or Fast). via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock cate-
gories are not active in Local

Direction control R/L Set mode to Auto


Preselection for direction 2(Y)
(Reverse, Low, Left or Slow).

Change Operation Mode to SPExt: Set mode to Manual


External set point written from the
application.

Change Operation Mode to SPInt: Acknowledge alarm


Set point entered from the faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 141/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name &


Description

Warning &
Alarm Indica-
tion
Actual Current
in % of Nominal
Control Point
and Mode
Actual Current
Value
Motor Status

Setpoint Indi-
cation

Running Di-
rection Indica-
tion

Extended
Actual Setpoint
View
Feedback

Normal View

Figure 53 - MOT2VVVF Default View

If a “current” analog input signal is connected to the Parameter MC the actual Nominal cur-
rent rate appears in the Faceplate (Default and Extended View).

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT2_VVVF

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 142/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 54 - MOT2VVVF Normal View

Additional information for the MOT2_VVVF is structured in tabs. The available tabs and a
short description of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual current value online trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

Maintenance Maintenance issues

IOStatus Substatus for DP, PA, FF Field Devices and LCC connected to Actual Speed, Output and
SPExtRef

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 143/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.3. Interlocks

Figure 55 - MOT2VVVF Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

ICX Safety interlock for direction 1(X). Stops the motor when running in direction 1(X) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting in this direction as long as the inter-
lock is on.

ICY Safety interlock for direction 2(Y). Stops the motor when running in direction 2(Y) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting as in this direction long as the inter-
lock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB3 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow
indication)

IB4 Process interlock Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on
Functions as start interlock when the parameter IBF=1 (Arrow
indication)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 144/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

IAX Combined Auto-start and Chain If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts
interlock for direction 1(X). and Stops the Motor.
Not active in POC Local This can be used to start and stop an object by process once
the group or operator has put it to Auto.
If “true” motor starts or re-starts with direction 1(X)
If “false” motor stops, when running in direction 1(X)
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA
stops the motor and the motor must be started from Seq or
Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

IAY Combined Auto-start and Chain If Object is in Seq Auto Mode or Central Auto Mode IA Starts
interlock for direction 2(Y). and Stops the Motor.
Not active in POC Local This can be used to start and stop an object by process once
the group or operator has put it to Auto.
If “true” motor starts or re-starts with direction 2(Y)
If “false” motor stops, when running in direction 2(Y)
If Object is in Seq Manual Mode or Central Manual mode, IA
stops the motor and the motor must be started from Seq or
Cen again.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PDX Chain interlock, previous drive for Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
direction 1(X). as the interlock is on 1(X).
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

PDY Chain interlock, previous drive for Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
direction 2(Y). as the interlock is on 2(Y).
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.

All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 145/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.4. PCC Interlocks

Figure 56 - MOT2VVVF PCC.Interlocks

Reference Table, PCC Interlocks

Type of interlock

ICX Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

ICY Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

IBX Same functionality as IB1 for direction 1(X) as described on Interlock chapter.

IBY Same functionality as IB1 for direction 2(Y) as described on Interlock chapter.

IAX Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

IAY Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

PDX Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

PDY Same functionality as described on Interlock chapter.

For possible configuration setting for Interlock Type and Interlock Direction refer to PCC, In-
terlock Bus (Process Control Connection) at Basic Object Reference Manual.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 146/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.5. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1...M3, LCB alarms below.

Direct Motor incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overtemp

– M2 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– M3 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– RUN Main Contactor on/off. Supervision for both directions. One delay timer.

– FB1 Supervision of “functional backsignal” e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer. Pulsed feedback supported as well with actual Period time ccor
on the Faceplate.

– FB2 Supervision of “functional backsignal” e.g. rotation, pressure, flow switch.


Delay timer.

– FB3X Supervision the speed after Start up or after Stop for direction 1(X).

– FB3Y Supervision the speed after Start up or after Stop for direction 2(Y).

NB: FB1, FB2 and FB3 are overridden in Local Mode on LcbStart

Additionally, Direct Motor incorporates the following 2 Warnings (does not trip the motor):

– HighCurrent: Supervision of motor current. Can be indicated simultaneously with one on


the alarms/faults above.

– Deviation High / Low: Supervision of the Difference between the Actual Speed and Set
Point

– General Warning: User Defined Warning

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2/M3 signal input level can be changed to 0 for
normal status by project constants.

In total, 4 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, M2, M3, LCB, and RUN, FB1, FB2, FB3X, FB3Y not going on (Contactor On/Trip
Alarm)

– one for RUN, FB1 and FB2, FB3X, FB3Y not going Off (Contactor Off/Frc Alarm)

– one for High Current Alarm

– one for the Deviation Alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 147/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 57 - MOT2VVVF Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor
(no alarm generated)

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm gener-
ated). Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Overtemp” as the alarm is on.

M2 MCC interface signal 2 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Overload” as the alarm is on.

M3 MCC interface signal 3 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as long
Default alarm text is “Availability” as the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the
operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can al-
ways be done independent from the POC/mode. The motor
will always turn to manual mode.

FB Feedback motor running in either The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback time.
on of the directions 1 (X) or 2 (Y) The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via the Pa-
rameter List and is set per default to 2s.

FB1 Functional Back signal 1 The FB1 signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback
e.g. Speed Switch time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via
the Parameter List and is set per default to 10s.

FB2 Functional Back signal 2 Like FB1, but without support for Pulsed Signals
e.g. Pressure Switch

FB3X Functional Back signal 3 for direc- Configurable as Alarm or warning to speed supervision at
tion 1(X) starting, running or stopping.
Speed Supervision Refer to chapter Speed Supervision.

FB3Y Functional Back signal 3 for direc- Configurable as Alarm or warning to speed supervision at
tion 2(Y) starting, running or stopping.
Speed Supervision Refer to chapter Speed Supervision.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 148/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the interlock is blocked
(disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic element and on the Base Control.

All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on MOT2_VVVF graphic Element directly and on the MOT2_VVVF Tag.

6.3.2.6. Trend

On-Line trend with actual current, speed and speed setpoint

Show/Hide Grid

Zoom Out (Y-Axis)

Switch between
actual current
Record Time and actual cur-
rent in % of
nominal

Figure 58 - MOT2VVVF Trends

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time

Figure 59 - MOT2VVVF Value Indication on Trends

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 149/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.7. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Motor will be started in Direction X


with Step No 30 in the Drive Group with
a delay of 5 seconds and only if pre-se-
lection P1, P2 or P3 is selected or
started in Direction Y with Step No 31
with the same delay when Pre-selection
P11 is selected.

This Motor will be stopped in Direction X


with Step No 1030 in the Drive Group
with a delay of 5 seconds or in Direction
Y with Step No 1031 with the same delay

Figure 60 - MOT2VVVF Group steps

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Start X Sequential start order of the Start delay of the motor Preselection Condition
motor to direction 1(X) within to direction 1(X) e.g P2 or P1 | P3 & ! P1
the Drive Group (P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Stop X Sequential stop order of the Stop delay of the motor n.a
motor from direction 1(X) from direction 1(X)
within the Drive Group

Start Y Sequential start order of the Start delay of the motor Preselection Condition
motor to direction 2(Y) within to direction 2(Y) e.g P3 | P4
the Drive Group P3 or P4

Stop Y Sequential stop order of the Stop delay of the motor n.a
motor from direction 2(Y) from direction 2(Y)
within the Drive Group

No of Steps Max number of steps in the n.a. n.a.


Drive Group
When a motor is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 150/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.8. Maintenance

Last Reset Time

Figure 61 - MOT2VVVF Maintenance

Out of Service” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox and Reset Counters button are
only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the motor is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual motor while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Drive to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Last Trip Reason Contains the Text of the Interlock, Alarm or PCC Message from the Time of the Last
Trip

Last Trip Time The Last Date and Time the Motor tripped

Number of Starts Number of starts of the motor

Run Time Time in hours that the motor has been running

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of starts and Run Time

Last Reset Time Date and Time the Number of Starts and Run Time was last reset

Note that there is an additional Parameter in the Aspect System that defines the Operators
ability to change the Setpoint on a stopped MOT2_VVVF on “BMI ModeControl”: Com-
mon.Setpoint.EnSPChngWhileStopped, which can be used in addition to the Start Speed SP
settings in the Maintenance Tab.

Parameter “ExternalStartSpeedSP” Drive Mode Default Setpoint Value if Drive not running

true any Parameter “StartSpeedSP”

false Seq or Cen Start Speed SP in Faceplate

Loc 0.0 (or nearest SP limit if outside)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 151/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

6.3.2.9. Extended View

Figure 62 - MOT2VVVF Extended View

Extra Additional information for the MOT2_VVVF is structured in tabs. The available tabs and
a short description of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

SP XLimits Setpoint X limit settings

SP YLimits Setpoint Y limit settings

Dev Limits Deviation limit settings

6.3.2.10. IOStatus

Substatus for Foundation Fieldbus, S800 Field Devices and Status of the External Setpoint
Reference (if LCC is used)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 152/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 63 - MOT2VVVF IOStatus

6.3.2.11. SP XLimits

Settings related to the Setpoint for Direction1 (X)

Figure 64 - MOT2VVVF SP XLimits

Settings related to the Setpoint

Reference Table, Limits

Limits Description

Setpoint XH Speed set point high limit

Setpoint XL Speed set point low limit

Setpoint SpeedX Rate of change Limitation for the SetpointX in %/S

Enable Auto Calc for Auto Calculation sets the Stepsize to a multiple of 10 times 1 or 5 dependent on
Inc/Dec StepX the Range of the Setpoint

Inc/Dec StepX If “Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Step” is not set, the Stepsize used for the Inc/Dec
Buttons and the Direct Entry Window can be set manually

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 153/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Enable relative Limits If set, the Max Increase / Decrease Values are enforced
for Entry Window

Max IncreaseX The Direct Entry Window’s high limit is set to the current Value plus the Value
given here

Max DecreaseX The Direct Entry Window’s low limit is set to the current Value minus the Value
given here

Use last Speed as Start When this box is checked, the Start Speed SP tracks the Speed Setpoint if the Mo-
SpeedX tor is running

Start Speed SPX Initial Set Point when starting the Motor

FB3X Run Limit Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to Step On fullfilled for DirX

FB3X Run Delay Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLimX

Hysteresis Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond, same


param for X and Y

FB3X Off Lim Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to Step Off fullfilled for DirX

FB3X OffDelay Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLimX

When the setpoint limits are changed from the faceplate, you must consider that these values
will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is performed and
the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT2_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

6.3.2.12. SP YLimits

Settings related to the Setpoint for Direction2 (Y)

Figure 65 - MOT2VVVF SP YLimits

Settings related to the Setpoint

Reference Table, Limits

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 154/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Limits Description

Setpoint YH Speed set point high limit

Setpoint YL Speed set point low limit

Setpoint SpeedY Rate of change Limitation for the SetpointY in %/S

Enable Auto Calc for Auto Calculation sets the Stepsize to a multiple of 10 times 1 or 5 dependent on
Inc/Dec StepY the Range of the Setpoint

Inc/Dec StepY If “Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Step” is not set, the Stepsize used for the Inc/Dec
Buttons and the Direct Entry Window can be set manually

Enable relative Limits If set, the Max Increase / Decrease Values are enforced
for Entry Window

Max IncreaseY The Direct Entry Window’s high limit is set to the current Value plus the Value
given here

Max DecreaseY The Direct Entry Window’s low limit is set to the current Value minus the Value
given here

Use last Speed as Start When this box is checked, the Start Speed SP tracks the Speed Setpoint if the Mo-
SpeedY tor is running

Start Speed SPY Initial Set Point when starting the Motor

FB3Y Run Limit Min Speed Value as Part of Run condition to Step On fullfilled for DirX

FB3Y Run Delay Maximum delay time for FB3RunSpeedLimX

Hysteresis Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond, same


param for X and Y

FB3Y Off Lim Min Speed Value as Part of Off condition to Step Off fullfilled for DirY

FB3Y OffDelay Maximum delay time for FB3OffSpeedLimY

When the setpoint limits are changed from the faceplate, you must consider that these values
will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is performed and
the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT2_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

6.3.2.13. Dev Limits

This Tab shows the Settings for the Deviation Alarm (MV – SP)

Figure 66 - MOT2VVVF Dev Limits

Reference Table, Limits

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 155/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Limits Description

Dev H Deviation high limit

Dev L Deviation low limit

Dev Hyst Deviation hysteresis

Dev Delay Deviation alarm time delay

When the deviation limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration
that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is
performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOT2_VVVF control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

6.4. Speed Feedback Supervision (FB3)


The Speed Supervision function is similar to the MOT1_VVVF, but available for both Direction
X and Y with independent configuration.

6.4.1.1. Available Parameters

CM Parameter References, also see chapter Parameter Description

No Name Data Initial Val Port Dir Description


Type

50 FB3Mode dint cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.FB3Mode 0 in IN: Enable FB3, 0=None, 1=FB3RunX,


2=FB3OffX, 4=FB3RunY, 8=FB3OffY,
16=FB3OffX_EnTrip,
32=FB3OffY_EnTrip, binary com

51 ExternalFB3Run- dint cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalF 0 in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=None, 1=X ,


Limit B3RunLimit 2=Y , 3=X&Y by Application

52 FB3RunSpeedLimX real 0.0 0 in IN: Min Speed value as part of Run


condition to Step On fullfilled for DirX

53 FB3RunSpeedTimeX time cBMI.Time10s 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


FB3RunSpeedLimX

54 FB3RunSpeedLimY real 0.0 0 in IN: Min Speed value as part of Run


condition to Step On fullfilled for DirY

55 FB3RunSpeedTimeY time cBMI.Time10s 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


FB3RunSpeedLimY

56 FB3RunSpeedHyst real 1.0 0 in IN: Deviation Hysteresis in %, used to


calculate IO.Out.DrvRunSpeedCond,
same param for X and Y

57 Exter- dint cBMI.MOT2_VVVF.ExternalF 0 in IN: Control ExternalFB3, 0=None, 1=X ,


nalFB3OffLimit B3OffLimit 2=Y , 3=X&Y by Application

58 FB3OffSpeedLimX real 100.0 0 in IN: Min Speed Value as Part of Off


condition to Step Off fullfilled for DirX

59 FB3OffSpeedTimeX time cBMI.Time10s 0 in IN: Maximum delay time for


FB3OffSpeedLimX

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 156/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

60 FB3OffSpeedLimY real 100.0 0 in Min Speed Value as Part of Off condi-


tion to Step On fullfilled for DirY

61 FB3OffSpeedTimeY time cBMI.Time10s 0 in Maximum delay time for


FB3OffSpeedLimY

62 FB3Txt strin cBMI.Empty_str 0 in IN: Description text for FB3, for NLS
g support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

129 GrpFB3Off- dint cBMI.DINT_0 0 in IN: Go to next stop step: 0=wait till
StepOverride ActSpeed =<FB3OffSpeedLim,
1=FB3OffSpeedLim to be
ok/Warn/Trip, 2=Ignore OffSpeedLim
and continue

With the Parameter FB3Mode the speed supervision function is configured.

These Options are possible:

Modes Description

FB3Mode = 0 None

FB3Mode = 1 FB3RunX, Speed supervision at starting or during operation for Dir1(X)

FB3Mode = 2 FB3OffX, Speed supervision at stopping for Dir1(X)

FB3Mode = 4 FB3RunY, Speed supervision at starting or during operation for Dir2(Y)

FB3Mode = 8 FB3OffY, Speed supervision at stopping for Dir2(Y)

FB3Mode = 16 FB3OffX_EnTrip, enable tripping on speed supervision at stopping for Dir1(X)

FB3Mode = 32 FB3OffY_EnTrip, enable tripping on speed supervision at stopping for Dir2(Y)


Binary combination is possible.

As an example, by setting FB3Mode = 4+2 =6 following functionality is configured:

FB3OffX, FB3RunY

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 157/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 67 - MOT2VVVF Speed supervision

6.4.2. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar, SPIntPar)
can be configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in
the Control Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 158/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 159/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 68 - MOT2VVVF Faceplate Control

6.4.3. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list.

6.4.3.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOT2_VVVF object the following message structure applies:

[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON] + [SPSUBMODE] + Blk: + [BLOCK


LIST]

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 160/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field, Local Control Box)

Out Motor is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Motor is in Forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Starting Motor is starting

Run1 Motor is running in X direction or direction 1

Run2 Motor is running in X direction or direction 2

Run Motor is running. Message only possible under ForcedX and ForcedY condition at
the same time

Off Motor is stopped

[STOP REASON] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock X from the group

SQY Stopped due to Sequence Interlock Y from the group

ICX Stopped due to ICX interlock

ICY Stopped due to ICY interlock

IB1 Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Stopped due to IB2 interlock

IB3 Stopped due to IB3 interlock

IB4 Stopped due to IB4 interlock

IAX Stopped due to IAX interlock

IAY Stopped due to IAY interlock

PDX Stopped due to Previous Drive direction X

PDY Stopped due to Previous Drive direction Y

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 161/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J E C TS

PCC-ICX Stopped due to IC interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-ICY Stopped due to IC interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IBX Stopped due to IB interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-IBY Stopped due to IB interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IAX Stopped due to IA interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-IAY Stopped due to IA interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-PDX Stopped due to PD interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-PDY Stopped due to PD interlock direction Y via PCC

[SPSUBMODE] Description

SPExt Set Point external coming from IO.In.ExtSpeedRef

SPInt Set Point internal coming from the faceplate

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB3 IB3 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB4 IB4 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAX IAX interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAY IAY interlock is blocked in the faceplate

FB1 Feedback fault 1 is blocked in the faceplate

FB2 Feedback fault 2 is blocked in the faceplate

FB3X Feedback fault 3 is blocked in the faceplate in X direction or direction 1

FB3Y Feedback fault 3 is blocked in the faceplate in X direction or direction 1

PDX Previous Drive X is blocked in the faceplate

PDY Previous Drive Y is blocked in the faceplate

6.4.3.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For MOT2_VVVF the following messages are
available to modify.

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

M2 M2Txt

M3 M3Txt

Local Stop LcbStopTxt

Contactor Fault FdBckTxt

Feedback 1 Fault FB1Txt

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 162/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Feedback 2 Fault FB2Txt

Feedback 3X Fault FB3Txt

Feedback 3Y Fault FB3Txt

These text parameters can be changed in the motor control module from Control Builder.

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FdBckTxt as well as FB1Txt and FB2Txt will
be added that gives the reason for the Alarm.

Suffix Text Constant Reason

On cBMI.AE.FBFail_On_SuffixTxt FB not true after FBTime

Trip cBMI.AE.FBFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB goes false while running

Off cBMI.AE.FBFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB not false after FBTime

Frc cBMI.AE.FBFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB goes true while stopped

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FB3Txt will be added that gives the reason
for the Alarm.

Suffix Text Constant Reason

OnX cBMI.AE.FB3XFail_On_SuffixTxt FB3X not true after starting drive at X Direction or direction 1
and FBTime elappsed

TripX cBMI.AE.FB3XFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB3X goes false while running drive at X Direction or direction
1 and run speed supervision configured as trip

OffX cBMI.AE.FB3XFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB3X not false after FBTime of stopping the drive from X Di-
rection or Direction 1

FrcX cBMI.AE.FB3XFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB3X goes true while stopped and lst order was X Direction
or Direction1

OnY cBMI.AE.FB3YFail_On_SuffixTxt FB3Y not true after starting drive at Y Direction or direction 2
and FBTime elappsed

TripY cBMI.AE.FB3YFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FB3Y goes false while running drive at Y Direction or direction
2 and run speed supervision configured as trip

OffY cBMI.AE.FB3YFail_Off_SuffixTxt FB3Y not false after FBTime of stopping the drive from Y Di-
rection or Direction 2

FrcY cBMI.AE.FB3YFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FB3Y goes true while stopped and lst order was Y Direction
or Direction 2

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 163/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7. MOTP

7.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type MOTP is used to control a motorized valve or damper with or with-
out analog position feedback in a drive group or standalone.

Additionally, to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions
are supported for MOTP:

– 2 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Overload & Availability

– 2 digital position limit feedback signals with error indication if both are present at the
same time

– 2 running feedback signals

– 2 Safety-, 2 Chain / Auto-, 2 process interlocks (always one per direction)

– 2 Force commands (one per direction)

– Automatic position control either with internal or external set point,

– Automatic Position and deviation control with

– 1 Analog Input and 2 Digital Ouputs

– 1 Analog Input and 1 Analog Output

– Position set point low and high limitation

– Position Deviation Alarm

7.2. Control
7.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visibility of ports per Instance in CBM.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 164/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.2.2. Parameter description

No Name Data Type Initial Val Port Dir Description

1 Name string[24] 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the actuator

2 Description string[40] 'Description' yes in IN : Description of the actuator

3 IO MOTPData default yes in_out IN/OUT: MOTPData Variable

4 E1Ref LoopCon- default no in IN(OUT): External Setpoint Connec-


trolData tion from Controller

5 Stw STWData default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control mod-
ule STW (startwarning)

6 Group GrpDrvCon default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control mod-
ule GROUP (sequencer)

7 GrpPosX1Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "go to po-
sition X", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 165/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8 GrpPosY1Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "got to po-
sition Y", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

9 GrpAutoStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "switch to
Auto or E1", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

10 GrpPosX2Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step only executed during
group full stop no 1001..1999 for "go
to position X", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

11 GrpPosY2Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step only executed during
group full stop no 1001..1999 for "go
to position Y", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

12 GrpManStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999 for "switch
to manual", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

13 GrpPosX1Delay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction X when
started from group start sequence

14 GrpPosY1Delay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction Y when
started from group start sequence

15 GrpPosX2Delay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction X when
started from group stop sequence

16 GrpPosY2Delay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction Y when
started from group stop sequence

17 GrpAutoDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Delay for switching to auto when
ordered from group start sequence

18 GrpManDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Delay for switching to manual


when ordered from group stop se-
quence

19 QStopMode dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: QuickStop Mode. 0 = stop at ac-


tual position, 1= go to position X, 2=
go to position Y

20 PreSelectionX string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned


to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2
OR P3 AND NOT P4). AND before OR.
Max 5x OR. No Spaces allowed.

21 PreSelectionY string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned


to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2
OR P3 AND NOT P4). AND before OR.
Max 5x OR. No Spaces allowed.

22 PreSelection- string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned


Auto to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2
OR P3 AND NOT P4). AND before OR.
Max 5x OR. No Spaces allowed.

23 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

24 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 166/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

25 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

26 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board /


Serial Interface

27 ME bool true yes left in_out IN: Main control voltage distribution
OK

28 M1 bool true yes left in_out IN: MCC interface signal 1, default
"Overload"

29 M2 bool true yes left in_out IN: MCC interface signal 2, default
"Availability"

30 M3 bool true yes left in_out IN: MCC interface signal 3

31 TorqueInverted bool false no in IN: Torque signal inverted. If true, sig-


nal torque alarm is logical true

32 TorqueX bool true yes in IN: Torque switch direction X

33 TorqueXTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.TorqueX_t no in IN: Description text for torque error


xt direction X (Torque error Not de-
layed), for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

34 TorqueY bool true yes in IN: Torque switch direction Y

35 TorqueYTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.TorqueY_t no in IN: Description text for torque error


xt direction Y (Torque error Not de-
layed), for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

36 FdBckRunX bool false yes left in_out IN: Run feedback signal directionX. By
default "ContactorX On"

37 FdBckRunY bool false yes left in_out IN: Run feedback signal directionY. By
default "ContactorY On"

38 FdBckTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Maximum delay time of contactor


response

39 DirChgTime time cBMI.Time2s no in IN: Down time when changing direc-


tion. If 0, down time is one task cycle

40 FBinverted bool false no in IN: Feedback signals inverted.If true,


signal "position reached" is logical 0

41 FBPosX bool false yes left in_out IN: Feed back signal "Position X
reached"

42 FBPosXTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.FBPosX_t no in IN: Description text for position error


xt X, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

43 FBPosY bool false yes left in_out IN: Feed back signal "Position Y
reached"

44 FBPosYTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.FBPosY_t no in IN: Description text for position error


xt Y, for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

45 FBTime time time#1m5s no in IN: Maximum delay time of FBX/Y re-


sponse. Must be greater than travel
time from X to Y

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 167/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

46 HoldTime time time#5s no in IN: Time delay for alarm annunc.,


MOTP tries to reach limit switch again
once he lost it, by setting the Hold-
Time to 0s this can be disabled

47 LcbStartX bool false yes left in_out IN: Start direction X signal (pulse)
from field LCB. Start = 1

48 LcbStartY bool false yes left in_out IN: Start direction Y signal (pulse)
from field LCB. Start = 1

49 LcbStop bool true yes left in_out IN: Any stop command (stop, not re-
mote..) from LCB. Stop = 0

50 LcbRem bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Seq or Cen de-
pending on config in MOT1_LCB

51 LcbLoc bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Loc or Tst depend-
ing on config in MOT1_LCB

52 LcbMaint bool false yes left in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode de-
pending on user defined config in
MOTP_LCB

53 LcbInching- bool false no in IN: Typically for LCBs with push but-
Mode tons. Energizes motor long as push
button is being pressed

54 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig,
1=POC LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with
LOC/REM DO, 3=POC LCB with Stop
on POC Chng, 4=POC CCR Start and
Rem Sig,

55 OrdX bool false yes out OUT: Start Order X. Output to contac-
tor X (e.g. forward, open, etc).

56 OrdY bool false yes out OUT: Start Order Y. Output to contac-
tor Y (reverse, close, etc).

57 OrdAO RealIO default yes out OUT: Analog Output for Analog Con-
trolled Dampers

58 RFSonSigErr bool cBMI.MOTP.RFSonSig no in IN False: If true, the drive remains


Err Ready for Start even if OrdAO or Actu-
alValue Signal Error is active

59 LocAlarmAck bool false no out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to reset
alarms in SCP's)

60 IAXTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain interlock


signal direction X, for NLS support
use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

61 IAYTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain interlock


signal direction Y, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 168/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

62 IBXTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process inter-


lock signal direction X, for NLS sup-
port use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

63 IBYTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process inter-


lock signal direction Y, for NLS sup-
port use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

64 ICXTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety inter-


lock signal direction X, for NLS sup-
port use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

65 ICYTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety inter-


lock signal direction Y, for NLS sup-
port use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

66 DirXTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.DirX_txt no in IN: Description text for direction X


(e.g. forward, open, up, etc), for NLS
support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

67 DirYTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.DirY_txt no in IN: Description text for direction Y


(e.g. reverse, close, down, etc), for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

68 ForcedXTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.ForcedX_t no in IN: Description text for forced direc-


xt tion X (e.g. forward, open, up, etc), for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

69 ForcedYTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.ForcedY_t no in IN: Description text for forced direc-


xt tion Y (e.g. reverse, close, down, etc),
for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

70 StwCen bool cBMI.MOTP.StwCen no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarn-


ing is triggered, when started from
Central/Sequenc

71 StwField bool cBMI.MOTP.StwField no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarn-


ing is triggered, when started from
field (from LCB)

72 AnalogCtrl bool false no in IN false: If true OrdAO is used instead


of OrdX and OrdY, ConPU and
FdBackRun errors are disabled

73 EnAuto bool cBMI.MOTP.EnAuto no in IN false: Mode Auto enable

74 EnE1 bool cBMI.MOTP.EnE1 no in IN false: Mode E1 (external setpoint)


enable. If EnAuto is FALSE and EnE1 is
TRUE the GrpAutoStep sets the MOTP
to E1

75 EnSeq bool cBMI.MOTP.EnSeq no in IN true: Point of control Sequence en-


able

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 169/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

76 EnCen bool cBMI.MOTP.EnCen no in IN true: Point of control Central enable

77 EnLoc bool cBMI.MOTP.EnLoc no in IN true: Point of control Local enable

78 EnMaint bool cBMI.MOTP.EnMaint no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable

79 EnFPLStopInAll- bool cBMI.MOTP.EnFPLSto no in IN true: If false stop from faceplate


Modes pInAllModes only works in POC Central

80 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm


List, 4 = Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic,
16 = Status, 32 = Trend, 64 = Faceplate

81 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (pro-


cess section)

82 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

83 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.InterlockTr no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 =


ALPrio# (1=lowest)

84 DevTr dint cBMI.MOTP.DevTr no in INIT: Alarm treatment for deviation: -1


no AE; 0 = Event ; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#
(1=lowest)

85 ModeTr bool cBMI.MOTP.ModeTr no in IN: True enables events on mode


change

86 StatusTr bool cBMI.MOTP.StatusTr no in IN: True enables events on status (po-


sition) change

87 IOStatTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.IOS_txt no in IN: Description text for Input/Output


board failure (IOStatus), for NLS sup-
port use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

88 IOStat4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 fail-


ure usally used for serial interface su-
pervision, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space

89 METxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.ME_txt no in IN: Description text for control volt-


age distribution supervision, for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

90 M1Txt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.M1_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

91 M2Txt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.M2_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm M2, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

92 M3Txt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.M3_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm M3, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

93 LcbStopTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.LocalStop no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local


_txt Stopped", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 170/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

94 FdBckTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.Contactor no in INIT: Description text for alarm "Main


_al_txt Contactor Error", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

95 XYErrTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.XYErr_txt no in IN: Error text for: X and Y postition


feedback present at the same time,
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

96 WarningTxt string[35] cBMI.MOTP.Warning_t no in IN: Description text for warning


xt (warning does not stop the Motor),
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

97 GrpX1Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal X to Group for


RUN calculation is set constant 1

98 GrpY1Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal Y to Group for


RUN calculation is set constant 1

99 GrpX2Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal X to Group for


OFF calculation is set constant 0

100 GrpY2Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal Y to Group for


OFF calculation is set constant 0

101 GrpAutoOver- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal AutoMode to


ride Group for RUN calculation is set con-
stant 1

102 GrpManOver- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal ManMode to


ride Group for OFF calculation is set con-
stant 0

103 GrpTripXOver- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip of direction X will not
ride initiate an auto change over of the
preselections

104 GrpTripYOver- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip of direction Y will not
ride initiate an auto change over of the
preselections

105 GrpTripAu- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip in AutoMode will not
toOverride initiate an auto change over of the
preselections

106 GrpRFSOverride bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start
won't be forwarded to the Group and
additionally, the Group will skip the
Step if not able to start

107 AlarmAck bool false no in IN: Alarm acknowledge

108 ActualValue RealIO default yes left in_out IN: Analog signal: actual position in %

109 EnExtPUSet- bool false no in IN: false = settings from Faceplate,


tings true = external PU setting parameters
can be used from glue logic

110 DeadBand real 2 no in COLD INIT: Deadband in %. no correc-


tive action if actual value - setpoint is
within deadband

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 171/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

111 ReCalcTime time time#10s no in COLD INIT: Cycle time for re-calcula-
tion of pulse length. If 0, calculation
of pulse every task cycle

112 MinPulseTime time time#0.2s no in COLD INIT: Miminum pulse length

113 GapTime time time#0s no in COLD INIT: Actuator gap. time which
is added to the pulse when direction
is changed

114 TravelTime time time#1m no in COLD INIT: Total travel time from po-
sition X to position Y

115 GainX real 1 no in COLD: Gain for pulse length calcula-


tion when moving in direction X

116 GainY real 1 no in COLD: Gain for pulse length calcula-


tion when moving in direction Y

117 TrackMan bool true no in IN: Auto setpoint tracks the actual
value when manual mode

118 TrackE1 bool true no in IN: Auto setpoint tracks the external
reference when E1 mode

119 SetpH real 100 no in COLD INIT: Inital setpoint high limit

120 SetpL real 0 no in COLD INIT: Initial setpoint low limit

7.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the MOTP Control Module Type a Structured Data Type MOTPData is available.
This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each motor in-
stance.

MOTPData contains the four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel.

MOTPData; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In MOTPInput retain Input variables to the motor

2 Out MOTPOutput retain Output variables from the motor

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/In-


terlock from Input modules to motor

4 ProcessPanel PanelLinkCon- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


sAndSP

MOTPInput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSelX bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir X,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

2 PreSelY bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir Y,
connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 172/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

3 PreSelX- bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


StdBy standby for Dir X, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

4 PreSelY- bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


StdBy standby for Dir Y, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

5 PreSelAut bool retain hidden true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Auto
mode, connected to PreBinData.PreSel in
case parameterized PreSelection is not used.

6 PreSel- bool retain hidden false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


AutStdBy standby for Auto mode, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

7 SeqPosX bool retain hidden 0 IN pulse: Start command direction X

8 SeqPosY bool retain hidden 0 IN pulse: Start command direction Y

9 SeqStop bool retain hidden 0 IN: Stop Command

10 SeqAut bool retain 0 IN pulse: Set auto command (Sequence Start


to Auto Mode)

11 SeqE1 bool retain 0 IN pulse: Set E1 (external) mode (Sequence


Start to E1 Mode)

12 SeqMan bool retain 0 IN: Set manual command (Sequence Start to


Manual Mode)

13 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

14 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

15 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

16 ForcedX bool retain 1 Forced direction X, if 0 -> drive is forced to


dir X, disregarding any interlock

17 ForcedY bool retain 1 Forced direction Y, if 0 -> drive is forced to


dir Y, disregarding any interlock

18 ICX bool retain 1 Safety interlock direction X

19 ICY bool retain 1 Safety interlock direction Y

20 IBX bool retain 1 Process interlock direction X, not active in


Local mode

21 IBY bool retain 1 Process interlock direction Y, not active in


Local mode

22 IAX bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction X. Not included in


RFS signal.

23 IAY bool retain 1 Chain interlock direction Y. Not included in


RFS signal.

24 E1Ref real retain 0 External setpoint if in E1 mode

25 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning for the motor con-
trol, creates a warning if true, no stop of the
motor

MOTPOutput; components

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 173/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Man bool retain nosort Signal indicating manual mode

2 Auto bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is in Auto mode.

3 E1 bool retain nosort Signal indicating E1 mode

4 Seq bool retain nosort Indication of point of operation SEQuence.

5 Cen bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is in central operation mode.

6 Loc bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is in local operation mode.

7 Maint bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is in


maintenance mode.

8 OutOfSrv bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the drive is Out Of
Service

9 TripX bool retain nosort Tripped direction X indication. activated


by M1, M2, M3, M4, AlarmXandY, Alarm-
FdBckCls, AlarmFdBckOpn, AlarmFBX,
AlarmTorqueX

10 TripY bool retain nosort Tripped direction Y indication. activated


by M1, M2, M3, M4, AlarmXandY, Alarm-
FdBckCls, AlarmFdBckOpn, AlarmFBY,
AlarmTorqueY

11 Rfs bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is Ready For Start.

12 RfsX bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is ready for open

13 RfsY bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is ready for close.

14 NoIntX bool retain nosort No interlocks. The motorized damper is


ready for start and no IA interlock.

15 NoIntY bool retain nosort No interlocks. The motorized damper is


ready for start and no IA interlock.

16 PosX bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is active in open position

17 PosY bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is active in closed position

18 Run bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the motorized


damper is moving. condition is:
(FdBckRunX and StartedX) or (FdBckRunY
and StartedY)

19 OrdX bool retain nosort Output order to open (also enabled during
simulation)

20 OrdY bool retain nosort Output order to close (also enabled during
simulation)

21 Deviation real retain nosort Output indicating deviation: actual value -


setpoint

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 174/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

22 DevH bool retain nosort Actual Deviation > High alarm limit

23 DevL bool retain nosort Actual Deviation < Low alarm limit

24 H bool retain nosort Setpoint high limit reached

25 L bool retain nosort Setpoint low limit reached

26 WSP real retain nosort Working setpoint (either auto setpoint or


E1 reference value)

27 ALNumber dint retain nosort Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
etc.)

28 ALPending bool retain nosort Indication of Pending Alarm

29 ALUnack bool retain nosort Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm

30 Field- bool retain nosort Field Start Release X is true in case of LOC
StartXRe- is selected and startconditions for the
lease mode and direction are o.k.

31 Field- bool retain nosort Field Start Release Y is true in case of LOC
StartYRelease is selected and startconditions for the
mode and directions are o.k.

32 ForcedRun bool retain nosort Indicating forced run, motor started by


e.g. hardwired LCB

33 FdBckOffErr bool retain nosort Main Contactor failed to open error (Feed-
back Off Alarm present)

34 SigErr bool retain nosort Signal Error summing OrdAO and Actu-
alValue Sig Error Status

35 FirstOrMax- string[32] retain nosort '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first or
AETag highest Alarm or Event causing an action
on the Motor, Group or Valve

36 FirstOrMax- dint retain nosort 0 Indication treatment of the first or highest


AEIndTr Alarm or Event causing an action accrod-
ing to Minerals Library Alarm Indication
Standards

37 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of the


Last Trip

38 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

PanelLinkConsAndSP; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Description


Val

1 Status dint retain nosort hid- Object Status Indication (Ready, Run,
den NotRFS etc.)

2 StatusModes dint retain nosort hid- Object Modes Indication (Seq, Cen, Loc
den etc.)

3 Cmd dint retain nosort hid- 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers


den

4 CmdModes dint retain nosort hid- 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Con-
den sumers

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 175/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5 Blink bool retain nosort hid- Enabling of Consumer Blinking


den

6 Setpoint real retain nosort hid- Setpoint from Process Panel to Con-
den sumers

7 MeasValue real retain nosort hid- Measured Value from Consumer to Pro-
den cess Panel

8 EnSPField bool retain nosort hid- Enabling of Setpoint Input Field


den

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Ready_Off 0 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Ready_PosX 1 2 Central Mode 1

3 Ready_PosY 2 3 Local Mode 2

4 Run 3 4 Auto Mode 3

5 Run_PosX 4 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 Run_PosY 5 6 External Mode 5

7 NotRFS_Off 6 7 ExternalCen Mode 6

8 NotRFS_PosX 7 8 Out Of Service 9

9 NotRFS_PosY B

10 Fault_Off 9

11 Fault_PosX 10

12 Fault_PosY 11

13 FaultNotRFS_Off 12

14 FaultNotRFS_PosX 13

15 FaultNotRFS_PosY 14

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 PosX 0 1 SetCen 0

2 PosY 1 2 SetSeq 1

3 AlarmAck 7 3 SetLoc 2

4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

6 SetE1 5

7.2.4. Project Constants


Name Default Value Data Type

1 cBMI.MOTP.AutoMode dint 0

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 176/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2 cBMI.MOTP.Contactor_al_txt string 'Contactor Fault'

3 cBMI.MOTP.DevTr dint 2

4 cBMI.MOTP.DirX_txt string 'Direction X'

5 cBMI.MOTP.DirY_txt string 'Direction Y'

6 cBMI.MOTP.DisabledIntMaxIndTr dint 13

7 cBMI.MOTP.DisableFPLLocIfLCBIsPOCMaster bool true

8 cBMI.MOTP.DisableFrcAlrInConPu bool false

9 cBMI.MOTP.DisableIAInLoc bool true

10 cBMI.MOTP.DisableIBInLoc bool true

11 cBMI.MOTP.DisableIBInMaint bool true

12 cBMI.MOTP.DisableICInMaint bool false

13 cBMI.MOTP.EnALFieldMode bool true

14 cBMI.MOTP.EnAuto dint 0

15 cBMI.MOTP.EnCen bool true

16 cBMI.MOTP.EnE1 bool false

17 cBMI.MOTP.EnFdBckFrcAlr bool true

18 cBMI.MOTP.EnFPLStopInAllModes bool true

19 cBMI.MOTP.EnLoc bool true

20 cBMI.MOTP.EnMaint bool true

21 cBMI.MOTP.EnMaintInCenSeq bool false

22 cBMI.MOTP.EnMaintOnlyIfStopped bool false

23 cBMI.MOTP.EnSeq bool true

24 cBMI.MOTP.EventStarting bool false

25 cBMI.MOTP.FBPosX_txt string 'Position Err X'

26 cBMI.MOTP.FBPosY_txt string 'Position Err Y'

27 cBMI.MOTP.FieldStopIfNotRemOrLoc bool true

28 cBMI.MOTP.ForcedX_txt string 'Forced Dir X'

29 cBMI.MOTP.ForcedY_txt string 'Forced Dir Y'

30 cBMI.MOTP.IOS4StopMotor bool True

31 cBMI.MOTP.IOS_txt string 'I/O Error'

32 cBMI.MOTP.KeepMaintInCenSeq bool false

33 cBMI.MOTP.LocalStop_txt string 'Local Stop'

34 cBMI.MOTP.M1_Inverted bool false

35 cBMI.MOTP.M1_txt string 'Overload'

36 cBMI.MOTP.M2_Inverted bool false

37 cBMI.MOTP.M2_txt string 'Not Available'

38 cBMI.MOTP.M3_Inverted bool false

39 cBMI.MOTP.M3_txt string ''

40 cBMI.MOTP.ME_txt string 'Ctrl Voltage Trip'

41 cBMI.MOTP.ModeTr bool true

42 cBMI.MOTP.PosDevErr_txt string 'Position Deviation'

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 177/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

43 cBMI.MOTP.RFSonSigErr bool false

44 cBMI.MOTP.StatusTr bool true

45 cBMI.MOTP.StwCen bool false

46 cBMI.MOTP.StwField bool false

47 cBMI.MOTP.TorqueX_txt string 'Torque Pos X'

48 cBMI.MOTP.TorqueY_txt string 'Torque Pos Y'

49 cBMI.MOTP.Warning_txt string 'Summary Warning'

50 cBMI.MOTP.XYErr_txt string 'Limit Switch Err'

7.2.5. Behavior with E1Ref LCC


The MOTP supports LCC for the E1 Mode external Reference, via the E1Ref Parameter. Please
refer to the 03 Loop Objects Manual for a description of this Datatype.

7.2.5.1. Backtracking

Set if the MOTP is not in E1 Mode. Note that the MOTP will switch to Manual Mode in case of
any Interlock or Trip as well, and therefore set Backtracking to true.

7.2.5.2. Min Reached / Max Reached

Set when the MOTP internal configured Limits are reached. The OrdAO Output Parameter
Value will be always be kept inside the Limits independent of the Backtracking Support of the
Block sending the Setpoint Reference via LCC.

7.2.5.3. Communication Error

In case E1Ref is connected from a Communication Variable and there is a Communication Er-
ror, the MOTP changes and stays in Manual Mode.

7.3. Operation
7.3.1. Graphic elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_MOTPConsumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information


as symbol.

VCO_MOTPCtrl Displays object control information. Allows direct entry of


set-point.

VCO_MOTPFBTxt Limit switch feedback information as text.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation.

7.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on MOTP Faceplates

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 178/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on MOTP Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Open valve/damper Change control point to sequence:


Direction 1(X) The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Close valve/damper Change control point to central:


Direction 2(Y) The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

Hold, Stops the Motor and Change control point to local


changes to Manual Mode The object is controlled locally in the field
via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock catego-
ries are not active in Local

Change Operation Mode to Man- Change Operation Mode to Auto: Set point entered
ual: Opn / Cls Command from from the faceplate.
faceplate

Acknowledge alarm Change Operation Mode to E1: External set point


written from the application

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 179/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name & De-


scription

Control Point and


Mode

Damper Status

Setpoint Indica-
tion

Running Direc-
tion Indication

Actual
Setpoint
Feed-
Extended View
back

Normal View

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT1

Actual Damper / Valve position Description

Opn Open Indication of DirX position

Open Indication of DirX position in tracking mode

Cls Close Indication of DirY position

Close Indication of DirY position in tracking mode

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 180/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 69 - MOTP Normal View

The faceplate first extended view gives more detailed information about the MOTP, such as:

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual position, position setpoint and analog output in case of analog controlled actuator
as on-line trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

SPLimits Setpoint limit settings

Dev Deviation limit settings

Maintenance Maintenance issues

IOStatus Substatus for DP, PA, FF Field Devices and LCC connected to Actual Position, Output and
SPExtRef

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 181/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.3. Interlocks

Figure 70 - MOTP Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

ICX Safety interlock for direction 1(X) Stops the motor when running in direction 1(X) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting in this direction as long as the inter-
lock is on.

ICY Safety interlock to direction 2(Y) Stops the motor when running in direction 2(Y) and prevents
Active in all POC/modes. the motor from starting as in this direction long as the inter-
lock is on.

IBX Process interlock to direction 1(X) Stops the motor to direction 1(X) and prevents the motor
Not active in POC Local from starting in this direction as long as the interlock is on.

IBY Process interlock to direction 2(Y) Stops the motor to direction 2(Y) and prevents the motor
Not active in POC Local from starting in this direction as long as the interlock is on.

IAX Chain interlock for direction 1(X). IA stops the motor if running in direction 1(X) and enforces
Not active in POC Local Manual Mode. The motor can not be started in X or set to
Auto or E1 Mode from Seq or Cen again as long as the inter-
lock is on.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

IAY Chain interlock for direction 2(Y). IA stops the motor if running in direction 2(Y) and enforces
Not active in POC Local Manual Mode. The motor can not be started in Y or set to
Auto or E1 Mode from Seq or Cen again as long as the inter-
lock is on.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

FrcX Forced direction 1(X) The drive is forced from the application to run in direction
1(X), disregarding any interlock and alarm.

FrcY Forced direction 2(Y) The drive is forced from the application to run in direction
2(Y), disregarding any interlock and alarm

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic el-
ement and on the Base Control.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 182/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol of the object.

7.3.2.4. Alarms

There is a built-in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1, M2, LCB alarms below.

Motorized Valve/Damper incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– M2 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– RUN Main Contactor on/off. Supervision for both directions. One delay
timer.

– FBX Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Position X

– FBY Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Position Y.


Timer delay

– XY Limit switch discrepancy supervision

– TorqueX Torque switch direction X supervision

– TorqueY Torque switch direction Y supervision

– DevH, DevL Position deviation from Setpoint supervision

Additionally, MOTP can indicate the following Warning (does not trip the motor):

– General Warning: User Defined Warning

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2 signal input level can be changed to 0 for nor-
mal status by project constants.

In total, 4 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, M2, LCB, and RUN not I on (Contactor On/Trip Alarm), FBX and FBY, XY,
TorqueX and TorqueY

– one for RUN not going Off (Contactor Off/Frc Alarm)

– one for Deviation Alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 183/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 71 - MOTP Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific mo-
tor (no alarm generated)

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm
generated). Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as
Default alarm text is “Overload” long as the alarm is on.

M2 MCC interface signal 2 Stops the motor and prevents the motor from starting as
Default alarm text is “Available” long as the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by
the operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop
can always be done independent from the POC/mode. The
motor will always turn to manual mode.

FB Feedback motor running to direc- The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback
tion 1 or X or 2 or Y time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned
via the Parameter List and is set per default to 2s.

FBX Feedback motor running in direc- The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback
tion 1(X) time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned
via the Parameter List and is set per default to 2s.

FBY Feedback motor running in direc- The motor is not started within the pre-defined feedback
tion 2(Y) time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned
via the Parameter List and is set per default to 2s.

XY Position feedback error X and Y position feedback signals are present at the same
time

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 184/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

TrqX Torque switch error to direction X Stops the motor to direction X and prevents the motor
from starting as long as the alarm is on (Hardware).

TrqY Torque switch error to direction Y Stops the motor to direction Y and prevents the motor
from starting as long as the alarm is on (Hardware).

DevH Deviation High (Positive) Indicates that the Position of the Actuator is higher than
the Setpoint

DevL Deviation Low (Negative) Indicates that the Position of the Actuator is lower than the
Setpoint

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the interlock is
blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic element and on the Base
Control.
All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on MOTP graphic Element directly and on the MOTPTag.

7.3.2.5. Trend

On-Line trend with actual position, position setpoint and analog output in case of analog
controlled actuator

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time

Show/Hide Trace
MV: Actual Position
Out: Analog Output
SP: Position Setpoint

Record Time
Show/Hide Grid

Figure 72 - MOTP Trend

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 185/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.6. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Damper will reach Position X with


step number 60 in the Drive Group with
no delay and only if pre-selection P2 or
P3 is selected

This Damper will reach Position Y with


step number 50 in the Drive Group with
no delay and only if pre-selection P1 is
selected

Figure 73 - MOTP Group

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Pos X1 1st sequential position order of the 1st position delay Preselection Condition
actuator to direction 1(X) within of the actuator to e.g P2 | P3 = P2 or P3
the Drive Group direction 1(X)

Pos X2 2nd sequential position order of 2nd position de- n.a


the actuator to direction 1(X) lay of the actua-
within the Drive Group. X2 is only tor to direction
executed on group stopping 1(X)

Pos Y1 1st sequential position order of the 1st position delay Preselection Condition
actuator to direction 2(Y) within of the actuator to e.g P1
the Drive Group direction 2(Y)

Pos Y2 2nd sequential position order of 2nd position de- n.a.


the actuator to direction 2(Y) lay of the actua-
within the Drive Group. Y2 is only tor to direction 2
executed on group stopping (Y)

Auto Step number in which the actuator Time delay to set Preselection Condition
will be set to Auto Mode the actuator to e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
Auto Mode (P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Manual Step number in which the actuator Time delay to set n.a.
will be set to Manual Mode the actuator to
Manual Mode

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive n.a. n.a.


Group

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 186/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

When a motor is not a member of a Drive Group, the Pos.Steps are “0”

7.3.2.7. Maintenance

Forced Limit Switch


Reached

Forced Limit Switch


Not Reached

Figure 74 - MOTP Maintenance

Out of Service and “Allow Alarm During Simulation” Checkbox and the “Block FB X Input” and
“Block FB Y Input” Buttons are only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the valve/damper is put out of service and is not taken
into account anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual actuator while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Drive to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Block FB X Input X Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Block FB Y Input Y Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Last Trip Reason The Reason of the Last Trip contains the Alarm, Interlock or PCC Text that was ac-
tive at the time of the last Trip

Last Trip Time Date and Time the Motor has tripped last

7.3.2.8. IOStatus

Substatus for Foundation Fieldbus, S800 Field Devices and Status of the External Setpoint
Reference (if LCC is used)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 187/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 75 - MOTP IOStatus

7.3.2.9. Extended View

Figure 76 - MOTP Extended View

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 188/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

The faceplate second extended view allows detailed settings for the Three-State Position
Controller (PU), used f MOTP First Extended View or “Auto” and “E1” Modes:

Tab Description

Par PU1 Three state position controller - Regulation Settings

Par PU2 Three state position controller - Regulation Settings

7.3.2.10. SP Limits

Figure 77 - MOTP SP Limits

Reference Table, SP Limits

SP Limits Description

Setpoint H Initial position set point High limit

Setpoint L Initial position set point Low limit

Enable Auto Calc for Auto Calculation sets the Stepsize to a multiple of 10 times 1 or 5 dependent on
Inc/Dec Step the Range of the Setpoint

Inc/Dec Step If “Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Step” is not set, the Stepsize used for the
Inc/Dec Buttons and the Direct Entry Window can be set

Enable relative Limits for If set, the Max Increase / Decrease Values are enforced
Entry Window

Max Increase The Direct Entry Window’s high limit is set to the current Value plus the Value
given here

Max Decrease The Direct Entry Window’s low limit is set to the current Value minus the Value
given here
When setpoint limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration that
these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is per-
formed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOTP control mod-
ule instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 189/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

In E1 Mode and with AnalogCtrl = false, two times the Deadband Parameter Value
will be added to the Setpoint H / L Limit.

This is to allow full closing/opening for E1 with Deadband active. In case the Limit
shall not be exceeded, it has to be implemented externally on the E1 Setpoint Reference or
Deadband should be set to 0.

7.3.2.11. Dev Limits

Figure 78 - MOTP Dev Limits

Reference Table, Limits

Limits Description

Dev H Deviation high limit

Dev L Deviation low limit

Dev Hyst Deviation hysteresis

Dev Delay Deviation alarm time delay

When Deviation / Speed Limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consider-
ation that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart /
reset is performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOTP control mod-
ule instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 190/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.12. Par PU1

Figure 79 - MOTP Par PU1

Reference Table, Par_PU1

Par_PU1 Description

Travel Time Total setpoint "travel" time (defined as time to change the setpoint from 0 to 100 %)

Gain Inc Gain for pulse length calculation when increasing the setpoint

Gain Dec Gain for pulse length calculation when decreasing the setpoint

DeadBand PU deadband in units, no corrective action if actual value - setpoint is within deadband

Recalc Time Cycle time for re-calculation of pulse length. If 0, calculation of pulse every task cycle

Min Pulse Time Minimum pulse length

Gap Time Actuator gap time which is added to the pulse when direction is changed.

Set new Times Used for recalculated the CON PU timers without download (warm restart). This is a pre-
condition to adjust CON-PU parameters from the faceplate.

When ConPu parameters are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration
that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is
performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOTP control mod-
ule instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 191/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.2.13. Par PU2

Figure 80 - MOTP Par PU2

Reference Table, Par_PU2

Par_PU2 Description

Con Pu In this mode, a three-state controller intended to control, by mean of pulses (increase, de-
crease), a process via an integrating actuator such as a shifting motor or a solenoid valve.

Time Based In this mode, the Actuator Position is simulated according to the travel time. If limit switches
are reached or WorkingSetpoint is on the upper or lower limit, the ActuatorPosition is adap-
tative corrected.

Fix Pulse In this mode, increase and decrease may be manually controlled by 3 buttons (Inc, Dec, Stop)
in the faceplate. Pulses with length of 1% of travel time and period of 3% of travel time are
sent to the IO’s as long as increment or decrement is active. This mode is preferably used in
cases where INC/DEC are directly connected to the MOTP (e.g. speed-controlled drives)

Inc Connection to boolean signal for increasing the setpoint

Dec Connection to boolean signal for decreasing the setpoint

Stop Stop increase / decrease


When the ConPu modes are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration
that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is
performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding MOTP control mod-
ule instance with Control Builder, after changing the values from the Faceplate.

7.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar) can be
configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in the Con-
trol Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 192/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC T S

Figure 81 - MOTP Faceplate Control

7.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4Alarm & Event
list.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 193/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOTP object the following message structure applies:

[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON + WSP] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field, Local Control Box)

Out Motor is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Motor is in forced condition

E1 E1 mode is selected. For external setpoint on analog control.

[STATUS] Description

Run1 Motor is running in X direction or direction 1

Run2 Motor is running in X direction or direction 2

Run Motor is running. Message only possible under ForcedX and ForcedY condition at
the same time

Off Motor is stopped

PosX When position X is reached

PosY When position Y is reached

Unk Unknown position. When no position is defined. When not present PosX or PosY at
same time.

[STOP REASON + WSP] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local mode. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock X from the group

SQY Stopped due to Sequence Interlock Y from the group

ICX Stopped due to ICX interlock

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 194/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

ICY Stopped due to ICY interlock

IBX Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IBY Stopped due to IB2 interlock

IAX Stopped due to IAX interlock

IAY Stopped due to IAY interlock

PCC-ICX Stopped due to IC interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-ICY Stopped due to IC interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IBX Stopped due to IB interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-IBY Stopped due to IB interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-IAX Stopped due to IA interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-IAY Stopped due to IA interlock direction Y via PCC

PCC-PDX Stopped due to PD interlock direction X via PCC

PCC-PDY Stopped due to PD interlock direction Y via PCC

<WSP> WSP is the working setpoint when motor started running.

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IBX IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IBY IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAX IAX interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAY IAY interlock is blocked in the faceplate

FBX FBPosX Open Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

FBY FBPosY Close Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

TrqX TorqueX Alarm is blocked in the faceplate

TrqY TorqueY Alarm is blocked in the faceplate

7.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For MOTP the following messages are availa-
ble to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

M2 M2Txt

M3 M3Txt

Local Stop LcbStopTxt

Alarm X and Y at same time XYErrTxt

Contactor Fault FdBckTxt

Feedback PosX Fault FBPosXTxt

Feedback PosY Fault FBPosYTxt

Torque Switch direction X Alarm TorqueXTxt

Torque Switch direction Y Alarm TorqueYTxt

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 195/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

These text parameters can be changed in the motor control module from Control Builder.

In case NLS is not used for Alarm and Event Messages (Project Constant
cBMI.AE.AE_NLS_Used is set to False), a suffix to FdBckTxt will be added that gives the rea-
son for the Alarm

Suffix Text Constant Reason

On cBMI.AE.FBFail_On_SuffixTxt FdBck not true after FdBckTime

Trip cBMI.AE.FBFail_Trip_SuffixTxt FdBck goes false while running

Off cBMI.AE.FBFail_Off_SuffixTxt FdBck not false after FdBckTime

Frc cBMI.AE.FBFail_Frc_SuffixTxt FdBck goes true while stopped

7.4. Application Examples


7.4.1. Damper close on stopped Fan
This is the standard application code for a Damper / Fan combination.

– GrpAutoStep 11

– GrpY1Step 10

– GrpY2Step 1010

In the application Code, PreselY of the MOTP is set to the inverted Run signal of the Fan, to
prevent the Damper from closing while the Fan is running.

The Damper will be closed on Group Stop as well as Group Restart if the Fan is stopped (re-
starting).

If the Damper is required to close immediately after the Fan trips, some additional applica-
tion logic would be required to give a Pulse to SeqPosY.

7.4.2. Y1Step on Group Restart only


The Gate should be closed on Group Start or Restart. Typical use is the filling of multi-cham-
bers Silos.

In this case PreselY has to be set to not PreselX and GrpY1Step should be GrpX1Step + 1000.
(Here, PreselX and GrpStepX1 are used, but it can be replaced it with PreselAuto and Grp-
StepAuto if needed).

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 196/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

7.4.3. Fan Damper position control loop


In this Example, the Position of a Damper (MOTP) is used to control the 592PI101 Pressure be-
fore Filter. The PIDCtrl parameter OUTCC is connected to E1Ref of the MOTP. This Loop Con-
trol Connection (LCC) transfers the setpoint, range, unit and status in both directions. The
ActuatorPos parameter of PIDCtrl does not need to be connected, the value is transferred via
LCC as well.

Figure 82 - Fan Damper position control loop

If the Damper (MOTP) is not in E1 Mode, the PIDCtrl Output value tracks the Setpoint value of
the Damper (Backtracking). This state is shown on both Faceplates as well, in case of Back-
tracking the PIDCtrl link “OUT” to Damper is colored and a yellow bar is visible above the E1
Mode button in the MOTP.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 197/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 198/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8. VLV1

8.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type VLV1 is used to control a normally closed one-way valve or actuator
in a drive group or standalone.

Additionally, to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions
are supported for VLV1:

– 1 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Availability

– 2 position feedback signals with error indication if both are present at the same time.
Timer delay.

– 1 Safety interlock, 1 Chain Auto Interlock, 2 Process interlocks, 1 previous drive.

– One or two-coil Valves supported (energized until Position Feedback or continuously).

– Totalisation and indication of number of operations (change from Close to Open)

8.2. Control
8.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to change the visibility of ports per Instance in CBM.

Figure 83 - VLV1 Block

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 199/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8.2.2. Parameter description


No Name Data Initial Val Port Dir Description
Type

1 Name string[24] 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the valve (allowed delimi-
nators are "." and "-", no blanks ":" or ";" al-
lowed)

2 Description string[40] 'Description' yes in IN: Description text of the valve

3 IO VLV1Data default yes in_out IN/OUT: VLV1Data Variable

4 Stw STWData default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module STW
(startwarning)

5 Group Grp- default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module
DrvCon GROUP (sequencer)

6 GrpOpnStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Open step no 1..999, if set to 0 -> not
part of group sequence

7 GrpClsStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Close step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

8 GrpOpnDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Open delay when started from group se-
quence

9 GrpClsDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Close delay when stopped from group
sequence

10 PreSelection string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.
Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3
AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

11 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

12 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

13 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

14 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board / Serial


Interface

15 ME bool true yes left in_out IN true: Main control voltage distribution OK

16 M1 bool true yes in IN true: Individual control voltage signal 1,


default "Availability"

17 AlarmInClsPos bool false no in IN false: If true the valve will create alarms in
the close position

18 OneCoil bool true no in IN true: If false, the FBCls Alarm is a Trip and
close order will not be activated as long as
IO.Out.Trip is active in case FBErrorMode = 0

19 FBinverted bool false no in IN false: If true, FBOpn = 0 means "Position


Open reached", same for FBCls

20 FBOpnEn bool true no in IN true: If true, a limit switch for FBOpn is


present, if false FBOpn will be simulated

21 FBOpn bool false yes in IN: feed back signal "Position open reached"

22 FBOpnTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.FBOpn_txt no in IN: description text for error feed back sig-
nal position open, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 200/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

23 FBClsEn bool true no in IN true: If true a limit switch for FBCls is pre-
sent, if false FBCls will be simulated

24 FBCls bool false yes in IN: feed back signal "Position close reached"

25 FBClsTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.FBCls_txt no in IN: description text for error feed back sig-
nal position close, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

26 FBTime time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time of FBOpn/Cls re-


sponse.

27 FBErrorMode dint cBMI.VLV.FBErrorMo no in IN: 0: FBError sends OrdCls; Simulation: 1=


de Full, 2= OrdOpn remains but not RFS, 4=Ord-
Opn, 8=OrdCls, 16=RFS Opn, 32=RFS Cls,
64=FBOpn, 128=FBCls

28 SamePosDelay time cBMI.Time0_8s no in IN: Delay to allow actuators in same position

29 LcbOpn bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: Open signal (pulse) from field LCB.
Open = 1

30 LcbCls bool true yes left in_out IN true: Any close command (close, not re-
mote..) from field LCB. Close = 0

31 LcbRem bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the point
of control to Seq or Cen depending on con-
fig in VLV1_LCB

32 LcbLoc bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the point
of control to Loc or Tst depending on config
in VLV1_LCB

33 LcbMaint bool false yes left in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depending
on user defined config in VLV1_LCB

34 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig, 1=POC
LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with LOC/REM DO,
3=POC LCB with Stop on POC Chng, 4=POC
CCR Start and Rem Sig,

35 CutOrd bool false no in IN false: Input to define Ord behaviour. True


= output deactivated when limit switch (FB)
reached.

36 OrdOpn bool false yes out OUT: Order Open. Output to contactor.

37 OrdCls bool false yes out OUT: Order Close. Output to contactor.

38 PrevDrive bool TRUE yes in IN true: Chain interlock "previous drive run-
ning"

39 PrevDriveTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain interlock with
previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

40 IATxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain / auto inter-
lock IA, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

41 IB1Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process interlock sig-
nal, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 201/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

42 IB2Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process interlock sig-
nal, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

43 ICTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety interlock sig-
nal IC, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

44 OpnTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.Opn_txt no in IN: Description text for open (e.g. forward,
open, up, etc), for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

45 ClsTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.Cls_txt no in IN: Description text for close (e.g. reverse,
close, down, etc), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

46 StwCen bool cBMI.VLV.StwCen no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning is


triggered, when started from Central/Se-
quence

47 StwField bool cBMI.VLV.StwField no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning is


triggered, when started from field (from
LCB)

48 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT.AutoMod no in INIT: 1= Disable IA in Man Mode if EnAuto, 8


e = Wait for next Trigger for Startup in Auto
mode

49 EnAuto bool cBMI.VLV.EnAuto no in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto


mode is activated on sequence start

50 EnSeq bool cBMI.VLV.EnSeq no in IN true: Point of control Sequence enable

51 EnCen bool cBMI.VLV.EnCen no in IN true: Point of control Central enable

52 EnLoc bool cBMI.VLV.EnLoc no in IN true: Point of control Local enable

53 EnMaint bool cBMI.VLV.EnMaint no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable

54 EnFPLClsInAll- bool cBMI.VLV.EnFPLClsI no in IN true: If false the normally-close valve can


Modes nAllModes only be closed from faceplate in central
mode

55 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List, 4 =


Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 = Status, 32
= Trend, 64 = Faceplate

56 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (process


section)

57 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

58 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.InterlockTr no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

59 ModeTr bool cBMI.VLV.ModeTr no in IN true: True enables events on mode and


point of control change

60 StatusTr bool cBMI.VLV.StatusTr no in IN true: True enables events on status


(on/off) change

61 IOStatTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.IOS_txt no in IN: Description text for Input/Output board


failure (IOStatus), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 202/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

62 IOStat4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure us-
ally used for serial interface supervision, for
NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space

63 METxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.ME_txt no in IN: Description text for control voltage dis-
tribution supervision, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

64 M1Txt string[35] cBMI.VLV.M1_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

65 LcbClsTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.LocalStop no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local Closed",
_txt for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

66 OpnClsErrTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.OpnClsErr no in IN: Error text for: Open and Close postition
_txt feedback present at the same time, for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space

67 GrpOpnOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, RUN backsignal to Group is


ride set constant 1

68 GrpClsOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal to Group is


ride set constant 0

69 GrpTripOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip will not initiate an auto
ride change over of the preselections

70 GrpRFSOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start won't
ride be forwarded to the Group and additionally,
the Group will skip the Step if not able to
start

71 AlarmAck bool false no in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

8.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the VLV1 Control Module Type a Structured Data Type VLV1Data is available.
This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the application for each valve instance.

VLV1Data contains the four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel.

VLV1Data; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In VLV1Input retain Input variables to the valve

2 Out VLV1Output retain Output variables from the valve

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/In-


terlock from Input modules to motor

4 ProcessPanel PanelLinkCon- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


sumer
VLV1Input; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 203/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

1 PreSel bool retain hidden 1 IN true: true = valve is pre-selected,


connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case
parameterized PreSelection is not
used.

2 PreSelStdBy bool retain hidden false IN true: true = valve is pre-selected as


standby only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to
Warning

3 EnSeqOpn bool retain true IN true: a group start step will not acti-
vate the valve till this signal is true

4 EnSeqCls bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not deac-
tivate the valve till this signal is true

5 SeqOpn bool retain hidden 0 Open Command

6 SeqCls bool retain hidden 0 Close Command

7 SetSeq bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq

8 SetCen bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen

9 SetLoc bool retain hidden false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc

10 IC bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal, active in all op-


eration modes.

11 IB1 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock


signal, not active in Local mode

12 IB2 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in


Local mode

13 IA bool retain 1 Auto and chain interlock signal. Not in-


cluded in RFS signal. Valve reopens in
auto mode.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 204/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

VLV1Output; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Auto bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is in


Auto mode.

2 Seq bool retain nosort Indication of point of control SE-


Quence.

3 Cen bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is in


point of control central.

4 Loc bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is in


point of control local.

5 Maint bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is in


maintenance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is Out
Of Service

7 Trip bool retain nosort Tripped that the valve is tripped indica-
tion.

8 Rfs bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is Ready
For Start.

9 NoInt bool retain nosort No interlocks. The valve is ready for


start and no IA interlock.

10 PosOpn bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is active
in open position

11 PosCls bool retain nosort Signal indicating that the valve is active
in closed position

12 OrdOpn bool retain nosort Output order to position open (also en-
abled during simulation)

13 OrdCls bool retain nosort Output order to position close (also en-
abled during simulation)

14 Opera- dint coldretain no- Accumulated no of valve operations


tionCnt sort

15 ALNumber dint retain nosort Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
etc.)

16 ALPending bool retain nosort Indication of Pending Alarm

17 ALUnack bool retain nosort Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm

18 FieldOpen- bool retain nosort VLV1: Field Open Release is true in case
Release of LOC is selected and startconditions
for the mode are o.k.

19 FieldClo- bool retain nosort VLVNO1: Field Close Release is true in


seRelease case of LOC is selected and startcondi-
tions for the mode are o.k.

20 FirstOrMax- string[32] retain nosort '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the
AETag first or highest Alarm or Event causing
an action on the Motor, Group or Valve

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 205/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

21 FirstOrMax- dint retain nosort 0 Indication treatment of the first or


AEIndTr highest Alarm or Event causing an ac-
tion accroding to Minerals Library
Alarm Indication Standards

22 LastReset date_and_time coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in


System Time

23 LastTripTxt string [40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of


the Last Trip

24 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

PanelLinkConsumer; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Status dint retain nosort hid- Object Status Indication (Ready, Run,
den NotRFS etc.)

2 StatusModes dint retain nosort hid- Object Modes Indication (Seq, Cen,
den Loc etc.)

3 Cmd dint retain nosort hid- 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers


den

4 CmdModes dint retain nosort hid- 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Con-
den sumers

5 Blink bool retain nosort hid- Enabling of Consumer Blinking


den

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 InterPos 3 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Opn 4 2 Central Mode 1

3 Cls 5 3 Local Mode 2

4 NotRFS_InterPos 6 4 Auto Mode 3

5 NotRFS_Opn 7 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 NotRFS_Cls B 6 Out Of Service 9

7 Fault_InterPos 9

8 Fault_Opn 10

9 Fault_ClsP 11

10 FaultNotRFS_InterPos 12

11 FaultNotRFS_Opn 13

12 FaultNotRFS_Cls 14

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Open 0 1 SetCen 0

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 206/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

2 Close 1 2 SetSeq 1

3 AlarmAck 7 3 SetLoc 2

4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

8.2.4. Project Constants


Name Default Value Default Value

1 cBMI.VLV.AutoMode dint 0

2 cBMI.VLV.Cls_txt string 'Close'

3 cBMI.VLV.DisabledIntMaxIndTr dint 13

4 cBMI.VLV.DisableFPLLocIfLCBIsPOCMaster bool true

5 cBMI.VLV.DisableIAPDInLoc bool true

6 cBMI.VLV.DisableIBInLoc bool true

7 cBMI.VLV.DisableIBInMaint bool true

8 cBMI.VLV.DisableICInMaint bool false

9 cBMI.VLV.EnALFieldMode bool true

10 cBMI.VLV.EnAuto bool false

11 cBMI.VLV.EnCen bool true

12 cBMI.VLV.EnFPLClsInAllModes bool true

13 cBMI.VLV.EnFPLOpnInAllModes bool true

14 cBMI.VLV.EnLoc bool true

15 cBMI.VLV.EnMaint bool true

16 cBMI.VLV.EnMaintInCenSeq bool false

17 cBMI.VLV.EnMaintOnlyIfStopped bool false

18 cBMI.VLV.EnSeq bool true

19 cBMI.VLV.FBCls_txt string 'Position Err Cls'

20 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.AnyKeepRfs dword 48

21 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.ClsKeepOrd dword 16#8

22 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.ClsKeepRfs dword 32

23 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.ClsNoTrip dword 168

24 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.ClsSimLs dword 128

25 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.ClsSimLsKeepOrd dword 136

26 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.OpnKeepOrd dword 4

27 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.OpnKeepRfs dword 16

28 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.OpnNoTrip dword 84

29 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.OpnSimLs dword 64

30 cBMI.VLV.FBErrConst.OpnSimLsKeepOrd dword 68

31 cBMI.VLV.FBErrorMode dint 0

32 cBMI.VLV.FBOpn_txt string 'Position Err Opn'

33 cBMI.VLV.FieldStopIfNotRemOrLoc bool true

34 cBMI.VLV.IOS_txt string 'I/O Error'

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 207/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

35 cBMI.VLV.IOS_useSigErrTr bool false

36 cBMI.VLV.KeepMaintInCenSeq bool false

37 cBMI.VLV.LcbRecloseEnable bool true

38 cBMI.VLV.LcbRecloseTime time 2s

39 cBMI.VLV.LocalOpen_Txt string 'Local Open'

40 cBMI.VLV.LocalStop_txt string 'Local Close'

41 cBMI.VLV.M1_Inverted bool false

42 cBMI.VLV.M1_txt string 'Not Available'

43 cBMI.VLV.ME_txt string 'Ctrl Voltage Trip'

44 cBMI.VLV.ModeTr bool true

45 cBMI.VLV.Opn_txt string 'Open'

46 cBMI.VLV.OpnClsErr_txt string 'Limit Switch Err'

47 cBMI.VLV.StatusTr bool true

48 cBMI.VLV.StwCen bool false

49 cBMI.VLV.StwField bool false

8.3. Operation
8.3.1. Graphic elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_VLV1Consumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information as


symbol.

VCO_VLV1FBTxt Object feedback information as text.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation

8.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on VLV1 Faceplates

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on VLV1 Faceplates

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 208/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Icon Description Icon Description

Open valve / damper Acknowledge alarm


Direction X (1)

Close valve / damper Change control point to sequence:


Direction Y (2) The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Change Operation Mode to Change control point to central:


Auto: Set point entered from The object is controlled manually
the faceplate. from the Faceplate with the buttons

Change Operation Mode to Change control point to local


Manual: Opn / Cls Command The object is controlled locally in the field
from faceplate via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock catego-
ries are not active in Local

8.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name &


Description

Control Point
and Mode

Valve Status

Actual Posi-
tion

Normal View

Figure 84 - VLV1 Default View

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT1

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 209/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 85 - VLV1 Normal View

Additional information for the VLV1 is structured in tabs. The available tabs and a short de-
scription of the contained information are shown below.

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

Maintenance Maintenance issues

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 210/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8.3.2.3. Interlocks

Figure 86 - VLV1 Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

IC Safety interlock Close the valve and prevents the valve from opening as long
Active in all POC/modes. as the interlock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Close the valve and prevents the valve from opening as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Close the valve and prevents the valve from opening as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IA Auto and Chain interlock Opens the valve and prevents closing in Manual Mode (de-
Not active in POC Local pending on configuration of AutoMode Parameter).
In Auto Mode, valve opens with active interlock and closes or
re-closes again if the interlock is ok again (“true” value).
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal

PD Chain interlock, previous consumer Opens the valve and prevents the valve from closing as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.

All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

8.3.2.4. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 211/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1..M3, LCB alarms below.

Normally closed Valve incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– FBO Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Open.

– FBC Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Close. Timer delay

– O/C Limit switch discrepancy supervision

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1 signal input level can be changed to 0 for normal
status by project constants.

In total, only one AlarmCond Block is used:

– for M1, LCB, FBO and FBC, O /C

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

Figure 87 - VLV1 Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific valve
(no alarm generated). The valve is not disturbed because of
this.

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm gen-
erated). Inhibits the M1 and LCB alarms below.

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Close the valve and prevents the valve from opening as long as
Default alarm text is “Availability” the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the
operator due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can al-
ways be done independent from the POC/mode. The valve will
always turn to manual mode.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 212/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

FBO Feedback Open The FBO signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback
e.g. End Switch Open time. The feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via
the Parameter List and is set per default to 10s.

FBC Feedback Close Similar as FBO, but for closing


e.g. End Switch Close

O/C Position feedback error FBO and FBC position feedback signals present at the same
time

All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on VLV1 graphic Element directly and on the VLV1Tag.

8.3.2.5. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Valve will be Opened with step num-


ber 50 in the Drive Group with a delay of
3 seconds

This Valve will be Closed with step num-


ber 1050 in the Drive Group without any
delay.

Figure 88 - VLV1 Group steps

Reference Table, Group

Group Description Delay Preselection

Open Step Sequential open order of the valve within Open delay of Preselection Condition
the Drive Group the valve e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
(P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Close Step Sequential close order of the valve within Close delay of n.a
the Drive Group the valve

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive Group n.a. n.a.

When a valve is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 213/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8.3.2.6. Maintenance

Forced Limit Switch


Reached

Forced Limit Switch


Not Reached

Last Reset Time

Figure 89 - VLV1 Maintenance

“Simulation” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox and Reset Counters button are
only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the valve is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Sim- Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
ulation nals of an individual valve while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Valve to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Block FB Opn Input Open Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Block FB Cls Input Close Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Last Trip Reason Contains the Error Text shown at the Time of the Last Trip

Last Trip Time The Last Date and Time the Valve tripped

Number of Operations Number of Operations is counting the times the valve was opened

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of Operations

Last Reset Time Date and Time at which Number of Operations was last reset

8.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar) can be
configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in the Con-
trol Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 214/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 90 - VLV1 Faceplate Control Permission

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 215/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

8.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list.

8.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the VLV1 object the following message structure applies:
[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [CLOSE REASON] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field / Local Control Box)

Out Valve is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Valve is in Forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Opn Valve is opened

Cls Valve is closed

Unk Valve is in a unknown position - not closed and not opened

[CLOSE REASON] Description

QSP Closed from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Closed from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqOpen

CSP Closed from the faceplate

FSP Closed from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Closed from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Closed due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Closed due to ME alarm

SQX Closed due to Sequence Interlock from the group

IC Closed due to IC interlock

IB1 Closed due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Closed due to IB2 interlock

IA Closed due to IA interlock

PD Closed due to Previous Drive

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 216/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

PCC-IC Closed due to IC interlock via PCC

PCC-IB Closed due to IB interlock via PCC

PCC-IA Closed due to IA interlock via PCC

PCC-PD Closed due to PD interlock via PCC

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IA IA interlock is blocked in the faceplate

PD Previous Drive is blocked in the faceplate

FBX FBOpn Open Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

FBY FBCls Close Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

8.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For VLV1 the following messages are available
to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

Local Close LcbClsTxt

Open and Close feedback at same time OpnClsErrTxt

Feedback open alarm FBOpnTxt

Feedback close alarm FBClsTxt

8.4. Application Example


8.4.1. OutOfService Mode example for a Valve

FBOpen := False & FBClose := False No Limit switch installed, or Valve stuck in between.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 217/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

FBOpen := True & FBClose := False Limit switch OK, Valve open.

FBOpen: = True & FBClose := True Limit switches inverted or wrong cabling.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 218/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9. VLVNO1

9.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type VLVNO1 is used to control a normally open one-way valve or actua-
tor in a drive group or standalone.

Additionally, to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions
are supported for VLVNO1:

– 1 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Availability

– 2 position feedback signals with error indication if both are present at the same time.
Timer delay.

– 1 Safety interlock, 1 Chain Auto Interlock, 2 Process interlocks, 1 previous drive.

– One or two-coil Valves supported (energized until Position Feedback or continuously).

Totalization and indication of number of operations (change from Open to Close)

9.2. Control
9.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

Figure 91 - VLVNO1 Block

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 219/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9.2.2. Parameter description


No Name Data Type Initial Val Port Dir Description

1 Name string[24] 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the valve (allowed delim-
inators are "." and "-", no blanks ":" or ";" al-
lowed)

2 Description string[40] 'Description' yes in IN: Description text of the valve

3 IO VLVNO1Data default yes in_out IN/OUT: VLVNO1Data Variable

4 Stw STWData default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module
STW (startwarning)

5 Group GrpDrvCon default yes left in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control module
GROUP (sequencer)

6 GrpClsStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Close step no 1..999 , if set to 0 -> not
part of group sequence

7 GrpOpnStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Open step no 1001..1999, if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

8 GrpClsDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Close delay when started from group
sequence

9 GrpOpnDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Open delay when stopped from group
sequence

10 PreSelection string [50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is assigned to.
Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (= P1 AND P2 OR P3
AND NOT P4). AND before OR. Max 5x OR.
No Spaces allowed.

11 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

12 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

13 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board

14 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-Board / Se-


rial Interface

15 ME bool true yes left in_out IN true: Main control voltage distribution
OK

16 M1 bool true yes in IN true: Individual control voltage signal 1,


default "Availability"

17 Alarm- bool false no in IN false: If true the valve will create alarms
InOpnPos in the open position

18 OneCoil bool true no in IN true: If false, the FBOpn Alarm is a Trip


and open order will not be activated as
long as IO.Out.Trip is active in case FBEr-
rorMode = 0

19 FBinverted bool false no in IN false: If true, FBOpn = 0 means "Posi-


tion Open reached", same for FBCls

20 FBOpnEn bool true no in IN true: If true a limit switch for FBOpn is


present, if false FBOpn will be simulated

21 FBOpn bool false yes in IN: feed back signal "Position open
reached"

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 220/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

22 FBOpnTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.FBOpn_tx no in IN: description text for error feed back
t signal position open, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

23 FBClsEn bool true no in IN true: If true a limit switch for FBCls is


present, if false FBCls will be simulated

24 FBCls bool false yes in IN: feedback signal "Position close


reached"

25 FBClsTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.FBCls_txt no in IN: description text for error feedback sig-
nal position close, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

26 FBTime time cBMI.Time10s no in IN: Maximum delay time of FBOpn/Cls re-


sponse.

27 FBErrorMode dint cBMI.VLV.FBErrorM no in IN: 0: FBError sends OrdOpn; Simulation:


ode 1= Full, 2= OrdCls remains but not RFS,
4=OrdOpn, 8=OrdCls, 16=RFS Opn, 32=RFS
Cls, 64=FBOpn, 128=FBCls

28 SamePosDelay time cBMI.Time0_8s no in IN: Delay to allow actuators in same posi-


tion

29 LcbOpn bool true yes left in_out IN pulse: Open signal (pulse) from field
LCB. Open = 1

30 LcbCls bool false yes left in_out IN true: Any close command (close, not re-
mote...) from field LCB. Close = 0

31 LcbRem bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Seq or Cen depending
on config in VLVNO1_LCB

32 LcbLoc bool false yes left in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches the
point of control to Loc or Tst depending
on config in VLVNO1_LCB

33 LcbMaint bool false yes left in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode depending
on user defined config in VLVNO1_LCB

34 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig, 1=POC
LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB with LOC/REM DO,
3=POC LCB with Stop on POC Chng,
4=POC CCR Start and Rem Sig

35 CutOrd bool false no in IN false: Input to define Ord behavior. True


= output deactivated when limit switch
(FB) reached.

36 OrdOpn bool false yes out OUT: Order Open. Output to contactor.

37 OrdCls bool false yes out OUT: Order Close. Output to contactor.

38 PrevDrive bool TRUE yes in IN true: Chain interlock "previous drive


running"

39 PrevDriveTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain interlock


with previous drive, for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

40 IATxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for chain / auto inter-
lock IA, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 221/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

41 IB1Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process interlock


signal, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

42 IB2Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process interlock


signal, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ pre-
fix and no space in the text

43 ICTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety interlock


signal IC, for NLS support use ||IL_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

44 OpnTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.Opn_txt no in IN: Description text for open (e.g. forward,
open, up, etc), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

45 ClsTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.Cls_txt no in IN: Description text for close (e.g. reverse,
close, down, etc), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in the text

46 StwCen bool cBMI.VLV.StwCen no in IN true: If true, automatic startwarning is


triggered, when started from Central/Se-
quence

47 StwField bool cBMI.VLV.StwField no in IN false: If true, automatic startwarning is


triggered, when started from field (from
LCB)

48 AutoMode dint cBMI.MOT.AutoMo no in INIT: 1= Disable IA in Man Mode if EnAuto,


de 8 = Wait for next Trigger for Startup in
Auto mode

49 EnAuto bool cBMI.VLV.EnAuto no in IN false: Mode Auto enable, if true Auto


mode is activated on sequence start

50 EnSeq bool cBMI.VLV.EnSeq no in IN true: Point of control Sequence enable

51 EnCen bool cBMI.VLV.EnCen no in IN true: Point of control Central enable

52 EnLoc bool cBMI.VLV.EnLoc no in IN true: Point of control Local enable

53 EnMaint bool cBMI.VLV.EnMaint no in IN true: Submode Maintenance enable

54 EnFPLOpnI- bool cBMI.VLV.EnFPLOpn no in IN true: If false the normally open valve


nAllModes InAllModes can only be opened from facplate in cen-
tral mode

55 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 = Alarm List, 4


= Event List, 8 = DetailGraphic, 16 = Status,
32 = Trend, 64 = Faceplate

56 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999 (process


section)

57 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

58 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.InterlockTr no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 = ALPrio#


(1=lowest)

59 ModeTr bool cBMI.VLV.ModeTr no in IN true: True enables events on mode and


point of control change

60 StatusTr bool cBMI.VLV.StatusTr no in IN true: True enables events on status


(on/off) change

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 222/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

61 IOStatTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.IOS_txt no in IN: Description text for Input/Output


board failure (IOStatus), for NLS support
use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

62 IOStat4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4 failure


usally used for serial interface supervision,
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space

63 METxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.ME_txt no in IN: Description text for control voltage


distribution supervision, for NLS support
use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in the
text

64 M1Txt string[35] cBMI.VLV.M1_txt no in IN: Description text for alarm M1, for NLS
support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no
space in the text

65 LcbOpnTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.LocalStop no in IN: Description text for alarm "Local


_txt Closed", for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

66 OpnClsErrTxt string[35] cBMI.VLV.OpnClsErr no in IN: Error text for: Open and Close posti-
_txt tion feedback present at the same time,
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and
no space

67 GrpClsOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, run backsignal to Group is


ride set constant 1

68 GrpOpnOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, OFF backsignal to Group


ride is set constant 0

69 GrpTripOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, a trip will not initiate an


ride auto changeover of the preselections

70 GrpRFSOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for Start won't
ride be forwarded to the Group and addition-
ally, the Group will skip the Step if not able
to start

71 AlarmAck bool false no in IN pulse: Alarm acknowledge

9.2.3. Data Type description


The VLVNO1 Control Module Type uses a Data Type VLVNO1Data similar to the VLV1Data Type
of the VLV1 Control Module. This makes it possible to create one Global Variable in the appli-
cation for each valve instance.

VLVNO1Data contains four components In, Out, PCC and ProcessPanel.

VLVNO1Data; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 In VLV1Input retain Input variables to the valve

2 Out VLV1Output retain Output variables from the valve

3 PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/Interlock


from Input modules to motor

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 223/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

4 Process- PanelLinkCon- retain Interface from / to Process Panel


Panel sumer

VLV1Input; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 PreSel bool retain hid- 1 IN true: true = valve is pre-selected, con-


den nected to PreBinData.PreSel in case parame-
terized PreSelection is not used.

2 Pre- bool retain hid- false IN true: true = valve is pre-selected as standby
SelStdBy den only used in case of cBMI.StdType = 1 to re-
duce IndTr to Warning

3 EnSe- bool retain true IN true: a group start step will not activate
qOpn the valve till this signal is true

4 EnSe- bool retain true IN true: a group stop step will not deactivate
qCls the valve till this signal is true

5 SeqOpn bool retain hid- 0 Open Command


den

6 SeqCls bool retain hid- 0 Close Command


den

7 SetSeq bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq
den

8 SetCen bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen
den

9 SetLoc bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc
den

10 IC bool retain 1 Safety interlock signal, active in all operation


modes.

11 IB1 bool retain 1 IN true: Operator blockable interlock signal,


not active in Local mode

12 IB2 bool retain 1 IN true: Interlock signal, not active in Local


mode

13 IA bool retain 1 Auto and chain interlock signal. Not included


in RFS signal. Valve reopens in auto mode.

VLV1Output; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Auto bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is in Auto
sort mode.

2 Seq bool retain no- Indication of point of operation SEQuence.


sort

3 Cen bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is in point of
sort control central.

4 Loc bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is in point of
sort control local.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 224/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

5 Maint bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is in mainte-
sort nance mode.

6 OutOfSrv bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is Out Of
sort Service

7 Trip bool retain no- Tripped that the valve is tripped indication.
sort

8 Rfs bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is Ready For
sort Start.

9 NoInt bool retain no- No interlocks. The valve is ready for start
sort and no IA interlock.

10 PosOpn bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is active in
sort open position

11 PosCls bool retain no- Signal indicating that the valve is active in
sort closed position

12 OrdOpn bool retain no- Output order to position open (also enabled
sort during simulation)

13 OrdCls bool retain no- Output order to position close (also ena-
sort bled during simulation)

14 Opera- dint coldretain Accumulated no of valve operations


tionCnt nosort

15 ALNumber dint retain no- Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
sort etc.)

16 ALPending bool retain no- Indication of Pending Alarm


sort

17 ALUnack bool retain no- Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm


sort

18 FieldOpen- bool retain no- VLV1: Field Open Release is true in case of
Release sort LOC is selected and start conditions for the
mode are o.k.

19 FieldClo- bool retain no- VLVNO1: Field Close Release is true in case
seRelease sort of LOC is selected and start conditions for
the mode are o.k.

20 FirstOrMax- string[32] retain no- '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first or
AETag sort highest Alarm or Event causing an action on
the Motor, Group or Valve

21 FirstOrMax- dint retain no- 0 Indication treatment of the first or highest


AEIndTr sort Alarm or Event causing an action according
to Minerals Library Alarm Indication Stand-
ards

22 LastReset date_and_time coldretain Last Reset of Runtime and StartCnt in Sys-


tem Time

36 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of the


Last Trip

37 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

PanelLinkConsumer; components

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 225/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 Status dint retain nosort Object Status Indication (Ready, Run, NotRFS
hidden etc.)

2 Sta- dint retain nosort Object Modes Indication (Seq, Cen, Loc etc.)
tusModes hidden

3 Cmd dint retain nosort 99 Commands from Panel to Consumers


hidden

4 Cmd- dint retain nosort 99 Mode Commands from Panel to Consumers


Modes hidden

5 Blink bool retain nosort Enabling of Consumer Blinking


hidden

Status; Bits StatusModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 InterPos 3 1 Sequence Mode 0

2 Opn 4 2 Central Mode 1

3 Cls 5 3 Local Mode 2

4 NotRFS_InterPos 6 4 Auto Mode 3

5 NotRFS_Opn 7 5 AutoCen Mode 4

6 NotRFS_Cls B 6 Out Of Service 9

7 Fault_InterPos 9

8 Fault_Opn 10

9 Fault_Cls 11

10 FaultNotRFS_InterPos 12

11 FaultNotRFS_Opn 13

12 FaultNotRFS_Cls 14

Cmd; Bits CmdModes; Bits

Name Value Name Value

1 Open 0 1 SetCen 0

2 Close 1 2 SetSeq 1

3 AlarmAck 7 3 SetLoc 2

4 SetAuto 3

5 SetMan 4

9.3. Operation
9.3.1. Graphic elements
Graphic Element Description Example

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 226/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

VCO_VLVNO1Consumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information as


symbol.

VCO_VLVNO1FBTxt Object feedback information as text.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation

9.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on VLV1NO Faceplates

For description of PCC Viewer see chapter: Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on VLV1NO Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Open valve / damper Acknowledge alarm


Direction Y (1)

Close valve / damper Change control point to sequence:


Direction X (2) The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Change Operation Mode to Change control point to central:


Auto: Set point entered from The object is controlled manually
the faceplate. from the Faceplate with the buttons

Change Operation Mode to Change control point to local


Manual: Opn / Cls Command The object is controlled locally in the field
from faceplate via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock catego-
ries are not active in Local

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 227/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9.3.2.1. Default View

Tag Name &


Description

Control Point
and Mode

Valve Status

Actual Position

Normal View

Figure 92 - VLVNO1 Default View

For description of Extended Info see chapter: Extended Info, MOT1

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 228/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 93 - VLVNO1 Extended View

The faceplate extended view gives more detailed information about the valve, such as:

– Interlocks (Interlock Tab)

– Alarms (Alarm Tab)

– Corresponding Drive Group issues (Group Tab).

– Maintenance issues (Maintenance Tab).

9.3.2.3. Interlocks

Figure 94 - VLVNO1 Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 229/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Type of interlock Description

IC Safety interlock Opens the valve and prevents the valve from closing as long
Active in all POC/modes. as the interlock is on.

IB1 Process interlock Opens the valve and prevents the valve from closing as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IB2 Process interlock Opens the valve and prevents the valve from closing as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.

IA Auto and Chain interlock Opens the valve and prevents closing in Manual Mode (de-
Not active in POC Local pending on configuration of AutoMode Parameter).
In Auto Mode, valve opens with active interlock and closes or
re-closes again if the interlock is ok again (“true” value).
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal

PD Chain interlock, previous consumer Opens the valve and prevents the valve from closing as long
Not active in POC Local as the interlock is on.
Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.

All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol.

9.3.2.4. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).


Inhibits the M1...M3, LCB alarms below.

Normally-open Valve incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. availability

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– FBO Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Open.

– FBC Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Close. Timer delay

– O/C Limit switch discrepancy supervision

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1 signal input level can be changed to 0 for normal
status by project constants.

In total, only 1 AlarmCond Block is used:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 230/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– for M1, LCB, FBO and FBC, O /C ,

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

Figure 95 - VLVNO1 Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific valve (no alarm
generated). The valve is not disturbed because of this.

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated). In-
hibits the M1 and LCB alarms below.

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Close the valve and prevents the valve from opening as long as the
Default alarm text is alarm is on.
“Availability”

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by the operator
due to an emergency in the plant. Local stop can always be done inde-
pendent from the POC/mode. The valve will always turn to manual
mode.

FBO Feedback Open The FBO signal is not coming within the pre-defined feedback time. The
e.g. End Switch Open feedback time is a parameter that can be tuned via the Parameter List
and is set per default to 10s.

FBC Feedback Close Similar as FBO, but for closing


e.g. End Switch Close

O/C Position feedback error FBO and FBC position feedback signals present at the same time

All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on VLVNO1 graphic Element directly or on the VLVNO1Tag depending on
configuration.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 231/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9.3.2.5. Group

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Valve will be Opened with step num-


ber 20 in the Drive Group without any de-
lay.

This Valve will be Closed with step num-


ber 30 in the Drive Group with a delay of
5 seconds.

Figure 96 - VLVNO1 Group

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Open Sequential open order of the Open delay of the Preselection Condition
valve within the Drive Group valve e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
(P2 and P1) or (P3 and not P1)

Close Sequential close order of the Close delay of the n.a


valve within the Drive Group valve

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive n.a. n.a.


Group

When a valve is not a member of a Drive Group, the Start Step and Stop Step are “0”

9.3.2.6. Maintenance

Forced Limit Switch


Reached

Forced Limit Switch


Not Reached

Last Reset Time

Figure 97 - VLVNO1 Maintenance

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 232/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

“Simulation” and “Allow Alarm during Simulation” Checkbox, Block FB Opn, FB Cls and Reset
Counters buttons are only accessible when you are logged on as a System Engineer

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the valve is put out of service and is not taken into ac-
count anymore by the corresponding Drive Group

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface sig-
Simulation nals of an individual valve while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Valve to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Block FB Opn Input Open Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Block FB Cls Input Close Limit Switch Value is blocked and can be Forced with the On/Off Buttons

Last Trip Reason Contains the Text of the Interlock, Alarm or PCC Message from the Time of the Last
Trip

Last Trip Time The Last Date and Time the Valve tripped

Reset Counters Reset button, to reset Number of Operations

Last Reset Time Date and Time at which Number of Operations was last reset to 0

9.3.3. Faceplate Control Permission


By the Property Attribute Override Aspect, the faceplate Write permissions (IntPar) can be
configured according the plants access and permission concept. This can be done in the Con-
trol Structure or in the Object Type Structure.

Figure 98 - VLVNO1 Faceplate Control Permission

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 233/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

9.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4 Alarm & Event
list

9.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the VLVNO1 object the following message structure applies:
[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [OPEN REASON] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field / Local Control Box)

Out Valve is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

Aut Auto Mode

Man Manual Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Frc Valve is in Forced condition

[STATUS] Description

Opn Valve is opened

Cls Valve is closed

Unk Valve is in a unknown position - not closed and not opened

[CLOSE REASON] Description

QSP Closed from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Closed from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqOpen

CSP Closed from the faceplate

FSP Closed from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Closed from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Closed due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Closed due to ME alarm

SQX Closed due to Sequence Interlock from the group

IC Closed due to IC interlock

IB1 Closed due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Closed due to IB2 interlock

IA Closed due to IA interlock

PD Closed due to Previous Drive

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 234/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

PCC-IC Closed due to IC interlock via PCC

PCC-IB Closed due to IB interlock via PCC

PCC-IA Closed due to IA interlock via PCC

PCC-PD Closed due to PD interlock via PCC

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB1 IB1 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IB2 IB2 interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IA IA interlock is blocked in the faceplate

PD Previous Drive is blocked in the faceplate

FBX FBOpn Open Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

FBY FBCls Close Limit Switch is blocked in the faceplate

9.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message is depending on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For VLV1 the following messages are available
to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

Local Close LcbClsTxt

Open and Close feedback at same time OpnClsErrTxt

Feedback open alarm FBOpnTxt

Feedback close alarm FBClsTxt

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 235/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10. Actuator

10.1. Basic description


The Control Module Type Actuator is used to control a control valve or actuator with Analog
Output and Position Measurement in a drive group or standalone.

Additionally, to the common basic functions for consumer objects, the following functions
are supported for Actuator:

– 1 additional interface inputs with MCC; for e.g. Availability

– 2 position feedback signals with error indication if both are present at the same time.

– Position Feedback Open/Close Simulation with configurable Position Limits

– Directional Safety interlocks, 1 Equipment interlock, Directional Process Interlock

– Actuator Speed Supervision and Low Speed Alarm

– Position Deviation Alarm

10.2. Control
10.2.1. Diagram Graphical Representation
The default view is shown, it’s possible to modify the visible ports in CBM.

Figure 99 - Actuator Block

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 236/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.2.2. Parameter description


No Name Data Type Initial Value Port Di- Description
rectn

1 Name string[24] 'Name' yes in INIT: Tag name of the actuator

2 Description string[40] 'Description' yes in IN : Description of the actuator

3 IO Actua- default yes in_out IN/OUT: ActuatorData Variable


torData connection to Glue Logic

4 SPExtRef LoopCon- default yes in IN(OUT): External Setpoint Con-


trolData nection from Controller

5 Group Grp- default yes in_out IN/OUT: Connection to control


DrvCon left module GROUP (sequencer)

6 GrpPosX1Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "go to
position X", if set to 0 -> not part
of group sequence

7 GrpPosY1Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "got to
position Y", if set to 0 -> not part
of group sequence

8 GrpSPExtStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Start step no 1..999 for "switch
to E1", if set to 0 -> not part of
group sequence

9 GrpPosX2Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Stop step only executed dur-


ing group full stop no 1001..1999
for "go to position X", if set to 0 -
> not part of group sequence

10 GrpPosY2Step dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Stop step only executed dur-


ing group full stop no 1001..1999
for "go to position Y", if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

11 GrpSPIntStep dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: Stop step no 1001..1999 for


"switch to manual", if set to 0 ->
not part of group sequence

12 GrpPosX1De- time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction X


lay when started from group start se-
quence

13 GrpPosY1De- time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Start delay for direction Y


lay when started from group start se-
quence

14 GrpPosX2De- time cBMI.Time0s no in IN: Start delay for direction X


lay when started from group stop se-
quence

15 GrpPosY2De- time cBMI.Time0s no in IN: Start delay for direction Y


lay when started from group stop se-
quence

16 GrpSPExtDe- time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Delay for switching to auto


lay when ordered from group start
sequence

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 237/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

17 GrpSPIntDelay time cBMI.Time0s yes in IN: Delay for switching to manual


when ordered from group stop
sequence

18 QStopMode dint cBMI.DINT_0 yes in IN: QuickStop Mode. 0 = balanc-


ing, 1 = go to position X, 2 = go to
position Y, 3 = keep current order
value

19 PreSelectionX string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is as-


signed to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (=
P1 AND P2 OR P3 AND NOT P4).
AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

20 PreSelectionY string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is as-


signed to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (=
P1 AND P2 OR P3 AND NOT P4).
AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

21 PreSelection- string[50] cBMI.Empty_str yes in IN: PreBins the consumer is as-


SPExt signed to. Syntax: P1&P2|P3&N4 (=
P1 AND P2 OR P3 AND NOT P4).
AND before OR. Max 5x OR. No
Spaces allowed.

22 IOStatus1 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-


Board

23 IOStatus2 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-


Board

24 IOStatus3 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-


Board

25 IOStatus4 dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Status signal of related IO-


Board / Serial Interface

26 ME bool true yes in_out IN: Main control voltage distribu-


left tion OK

27 M1 bool cBMI.Actua- yes in IN true: Individual control voltage


tor.M1NormalValue signal 1, default "Availability"

28 Torque- bool false no in IN: Torque signal inverted. If true,


Inverted signal torque alarm is logical true

29 TorqueX bool true yes in IN: Torque switch direction X

30 TorqueXTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for torque er-


tor.TorqueX_txt ror direction X (Torque error Not
delayed), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

31 TorqueY bool true yes in IN: Torque switch direction Y

32 TorqueYTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for torque er-


tor.TorqueY_txt ror direction Y (Torque error Not
delayed), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 238/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

33 FBinverted bool false no in IN: Feedback signals inverted.If


true, signal "position reached" is
logical 0

34 FBPosX bool false yes in_out IN: Feedback signal "Position X


left reached"

35 EnFBPosX bool true no in IN: If false, Feedback signal "Posi-


tion X reached" is simulated

36 DirXTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for direction X


tor.DirX_txt (e.g. forward, open, up, etc), for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

37 FBPosXTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for position


tor.FBPosX_txt error X, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

38 FBPosY bool false yes in_out IN: Feedback signal "Position Y


left reached"

39 EnFBPosY bool true no in IN: If false, Feedback signal "Posi-


tion Y reached" is simulated

40 DirYTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for direction Y


tor.DirY_txt (e.g. reverse, close, down, etc), for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

41 FBPosYTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for position


tor.FBPosY_txt error Y, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

42 FBErrorMode dint cBMI.Actua- no in IN: 0: FBError trips Actuator, 16=


tor.FBErrorMode Simulate RFS Opn, 32= Simulate
RFS Cls, 64= Simulate FBOpn,
128= Simulate FBCls

43 LcbStartX bool false no in_out IN: Start direction X signal (pulse)


left from field LCB. Start = 1

44 LcbStartY bool false no in_out IN: Start direction Y signal (pulse)


left from field LCB. Start = 1

45 LcbStop bool true no in_out IN: Any stop command (stop, not
left remote..) from LCB. Stop = 0

46 LcbRem bool false no in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches


left the point of control to Seq or Cen
depending on config in
MOT1_LCB

47 LcbLoc bool false no in_out IN pulse: A positive pulse switches


left the point of control to Loc or Tst
depending on config in
MOT1_LCB

48 LcbMaint bool false no in_out IN true: Set Maintenance Mode


left depending on user defined config
in Actuator_LCB

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 239/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

49 LcbType dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: 0=POC CCR Start and Stop Sig,
1=POC LCB, 2=Hardwired LCB
with LOC/REM DO, 3=POC LCB
with Stop on POC Chng, 4=POC
CCR Start and Rem Sig,

50 LcbInc bool false no in_out IN false: Increase Setpoint (X,


Open) signal from field

51 LcbDec bool false no in_out IN false: Decrease Setpoint (Y,


Close) signal from field

52 LcbSpeed real 1.0 no in IN 1: Change Rate for Setpoint by


LCB increase / decrease in % /
sec

53 OrdAO RealIO default yes out OUT: Analog Output for Analog
Controlled Dampers

54 LocAlarmAck bool false no out OUT: Alarm reset pulse (e.g. to re-
set alarms in SCP’s)

55 ActualValue RealIO yes in_out IN: Analog I/O signal: Actual Posi-
left tion

56 BalRef real 0.0 no in IN: BALancing REFerence input.


Safety value assigned to the
OrdAO in case Trip or HW error
occurs.

57 AfterBalMode dint 1 no in IN: After balance set mode: [0=


Last Mode, 1=Man, 2=E1]

58 EnBalCtrl dint 1 no in IN: Balancing in case of Trip or


Signal Error [0 = off, keep OrdAO,
1 = default, Balancing for 10s, 2 =
Balancing if in E1 ]

59 IAXTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process


interlock signal direction X, for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

60 IAYTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for process


interlock signal direction Y, for
NLS support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix
and no space in the text

61 IBTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for equip-


ment interlock, for NLS support
use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space
in the text

62 ICXTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety in-


terlock signal direction X, for NLS
support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

63 ICYTxt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for safety in-


terlock signal direction Y, for NLS
support use ||IL_NLS_ prefix and
no space in the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 240/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

64 ForcedXTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for forced di-


tor.ForcedX_txt rection X (e.g. forward, open, up,
etc), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

65 ForcedYTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for forced di-


tor.ForcedY_txt rection Y (e.g. reverse, close,
down, etc), for NLS support use
||IL_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

66 EnSPInt bool cBMI.Actuator.En- no in IN false: Internal Setpoint refer-


SPInt ence enable

67 EnSPExt bool cBMI.Actuator.En- no in IN false: External Setpoint refer-


SPExt ence enable

68 EnSeq bool cBMI.Actua- no in IN true: Point of control Sequence


tor.EnSeq enable

69 EnCen bool cBMI.Actuator.En- no in IN true: Point of control Central


Cen enable

70 EnLoc bool cBMI.Actuator.En- no in IN true: Point of control Local ena-


Loc ble

71 EnMaint bool cBMI.Actua- no in IN true: Submode Maintenance


tor.EnMaint enable

72 EnFPL- bool cBMI.Actua- no in IN true: If false, stop from face-


StopInAll- tor.EnFPLStopInAll- plate only works in POC Central
Modes Modes

73 ExtendedInfo dint cBMI.DINT_0 no in IN: Mux 1 = ConsumerExt, 2 =


Alarm List, 4 = Event List, 8 = De-
tailGraphic, 16 = Status, 32 =
Trend, 64 = Faceplate

74 Class dint 1 no in INIT: Alarm/Event class 1 ... 9999


(process section)

75 AlarmTr dint cBMI.AE.AlarmTr no in INIT: Alarm Treatment; 1,2,3 =


ALPrio# (1=lowest)

76 InterlockTr dint cBMI.AE.InterlockTr no in INIT: Interlock Treatment; 1,2,3 =


ALPrio# (1=lowest)

77 DevTr dint cBMI.Actua- no in INIT: Alarm treatment for devia-


tor.DevTr tion: -1 no AE; 0 = Event ; 1,2,3 =
ALPrio# (1=lowest)

78 ModeTr bool cBMI.Actua- no in IN: True enables events on mode


tor.ModeTr change

79 StatusTr bool cBMI.Actuator.Sta- no in IN: True enables events on status


tusTr (position) change

80 IOStatTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for In-


tor.IOS_txt put/Output board failure (IOSta-
tus), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 241/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

81 IOStat4Txt string[35] cBMI.Empty_str no in IN: Description text for IOStatus4


failure usally used for serial inter-
face supervision, for NLS support
use ||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space

82 METxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for control


tor.ME_txt voltage distribution supervision,
for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

83 M1Txt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for alarm M1,


tor.M1_txt for NLS support use ||AE_NLS_
prefix and no space in the text

84 LcbStopTxt string[35] cBMI.Actuator.Lo- no in IN: Description text for alarm "Lo-


calStop_txt cal Stopped", for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

85 XYErrTxt string[35] cBMI.Actuator.XY- no in IN: Error text for: X and Y posti-


Err_txt tion feedback present at the
same time, for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

86 WarningTxt string[35] cBMI.Actua- no in IN: Description text for warning


tor.Warning_txt (warning does not stop the Mo-
tor), for NLS support use
||AE_NLS_ prefix and no space in
the text

87 GrpX1Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal X to Group


for RUN calculation is set con-
stant 1

88 GrpY1Override bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal Y to Group


for RUN calculation is set con-
stant 1

89 GrpX2Over- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal X to Group


ride for OFF calculation is set constant
0

90 GrpY2Over- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal Y to Group


ride for OFF calculation is set constant
0

91 GrpSPEx- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal AutoMode


tOverride to Group for RUN calculation is
set constant 1

92 GrpSPIntOver- bool false no in IN: If true, backsignal ManMode to


ride Group for OFF calculation is set
constant 0

93 GrpTripXOver- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip of direction X will


ride not initiate an auto change over
of the preselections

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 242/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

94 GrpTripYOver- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip of direction Y will


ride not initiate an auto change over
of the preselections

95 GrpTripSPEx- bool false no in IN: If true, a trip in E1 Mode will


tOverride not initiate an auto change over
of the preselections

96 GrpRFSOver- bool false no in IN false: If true, a not Ready for


ride Start won't be forwarded to the
Group and additionally, the Group
will skip the Step if not able to
start

97 AlarmAck bool false no in IN: Alarm acknowledge

98 EnExtSPLimits bool false no in IN: If true, COLD INIT Parameters


for Setpoint below can be used
from Glue Logic and overwrite the
Faceplate Values

99 SP_TrackBal bool true no in COLD INIT: Internal setpoint


tracks the actual value when bal-
ancing

100 SP_TrackSPExt bool true no in COLD INIT: Internal setpoint


tracks the external reference
when SPExt mode

10 SP_HiLim real 100.0 no in COLD INIT: Inital setpoint high


limit

1012 SP_LoLim real 0.0 no in COLD INIT: Initial setpoint low


limit

10.2.3. Data Type description


Together with the Actuator Control Module Type a Structured Data Type ActuatorData is
available, that holds the Variables In and Out of the two Types ActuatorInput and Actua-
torOutput. This Datatype contains all Variables that are used in the Application Logic.

ActuatorData; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

In ActuatorIn- retain Input variables to the actuator


put

Out ActuatorOut- retain Output variables from the actuator


put

PCC PCCComData retain IN Interlock Bus, PriorityCommand/Interlock


from Input modules to damper, gate, actuator

Pro- Panel- retain Interface from / to ProcessPanel


cess- LinkCon-
Panel sAndSP

ActuatorInput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 243/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

1 PreSelX bool retain hid- true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir X,
den connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

2 PreSelY bool retain hid- true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Dir Y,
den connected to PreBinData.PreSel in case pa-
rameterized PreSelection is not used.

3 PreSelXStdBy bool retain hid- false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


den standby for Dir X, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

4 PreSelYStdBy bool retain hid- false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


den standby for Dir Y, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

5 PreSelSPExt bool retain hid- true IN true: true = drive is pre-selected for Auto
den mode, connected to PreBinData.PreSel in
case parameterized PreSelection is not used.

6 Pre- bool retain hid- false IN true: true = drive is pre-selected as


SelSPExtStdBy den standby for Auto mode, only used in case of
cBMI.StdType = 1 to reduce IndTr to Warning

7 SeqPosX bool retain hid- 0 IN pulse: Start command direction X / Open


den

8 SeqPosY bool retain hid- 0 IN pulse: Start command direction Y / Close


den

9 SeqSPExt bool retain 0 IN pulse: Set External Setpoint Reference (Se-


quence Start to SPExt Mode)

10 SeqSPInt bool retain 0 IN pulse: Set Internal Setpoint Reference (Se-


quence Start to SPInt Mode)

11 SetBalancing bool retain false IN pulse: Set Balancing Mode

12 SetSeq bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Seq
den

13 SetCen bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Cen
den

14 SetLoc bool retain hid- false IN pulse: external POC change to Loc
den

15 ForcedX bool retain 1 Forced direction X, if 0 -> drive is forced to dir


X, disregarding any interlock

16 ForcedY bool retain 1 Forced direction Y, if 0 -> drive is forced to dir


Y, disregarding any interlock

17 ICX bool retain 1 Safety interlock direction X

18 ICY bool retain 1 Safety interlock direction Y

19 IB bool retain 1 Equipment interlock direction X, not active in


Local mode

20 IAX bool retain 1 Process interlock direction X. Not included in


RFS signal.

21 IAY bool retain 1 Process interlock direction Y. Not included in


RFS signal.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 244/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

22 SPExtRef real retain 0 External setpoint if in SPExt mode, only used


if SPExtRef is not connected

23 Warning bool retain false IN false: External Warning shown in FPL if


true, no stop of the Actuator

ActuatorOutput; components

Name Data Type Attributes Initial Val Description

1 SPInt bool retain no- Indication of Mode Manual (Internal Set-


sort point Reference)

2 SPExt bool retain no- Indication of Mode E1 (External Setpoint


sort Reference)

3 Balancing bool retain no- Indication of Mode Balancing (Trip or Sig-


sort nal Error Default Value)

4 Seq bool retain no- Indication of point of operation SEQuence.


sort

5 Cen bool retain no- Signal indicating that the motorized


sort damper is in central operation mode.

6 Loc bool retain no- Signal indicating that the motorized


sort damper is in local operation mode.

7 Maint bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is in


sort maintenance mode.

8 OutOfSrv bool retain no- Signal indicating that the drive is Out Of
sort Service

9 TripX bool retain no- Tripped direction X indication. activated by


sort M1, M2, M3, M4, AlarmXandY, Alarm-
FdBckCls, AlarmFdBckOpn, AlarmFBX,
AlarmTorqueX

10 TripY bool retain no- Tripped direction Y indication. activated by


sort M1, M2, M3, M4, AlarmXandY, Alarm-
FdBckCls, AlarmFdBckOpn, AlarmFBY,
AlarmTorqueY

11 Rfs bool retain no- Signal indicating that the motorized


sort damper is Ready For Start.

12 RfsX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the motorized


sort damper is ready for open

13 RfsY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the motorized


sort damper is ready for close.

14 NoIntX bool retain no- No interlocks. The actuator is ready for


sort start and no IA interlock.

15 NoIntY bool retain no- No interlocks. The actuator is ready for


sort start and no IA interlock.

16 PosX bool retain no- Signal indicating that the actuator is active
sort in open position, FBPosX and PCC_FBX, re-
mains true for HoldTime

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 245/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

17 PosY bool retain no- Signal indicating that the actuator is active
sort in closed position, FBPosY and PCC_FBY,
remains true for HoldTime

18 IdentRun bool retain no- Actuator Position Identification Run is on,


sort the Actuator is initializing ActualValue for
PosX and PosY

19 ActualSpeed real retain no- Output rate of change of ActualValue (Ac-


sort tuator Position), only updated while Actua-
tor is moving

20 SpeedL bool retain no- Actual Speed < Speed Low alarm limit and
sort Actuator Speed Measurement Enabled

21 SpeedEna- bool retain no- Actual Speed Measurement Enabled: (Set-


bled sort point - ActualValue) >

22 Deviation real retain no- Output actual deviation in engineering


sort units: actual value - working setpoint

23 DevH bool retain no- Actual Deviation > High alarm limit
sort

24 DevL bool retain no- Actual Deviation < Low alarm limit
sort

25 H bool retain no- Setpoint high limit reached


sort

26 L bool retain no- Setpoint low limit reached


sort

27 WSP real retain no- Working setpoint (either auto setpoint or


sort E1 reference value)

28 ALNumber dint retain no- Actual Alarm Number (M1...M4, FB1, FB2
sort etc.)

29 ALPending bool retain no- Indication of Pending Alarm


sort

30 ALUnack bool retain no- Indication of Unacknowledged Alarm


sort

31 Field- bool retain no- Field Start Release X is true in case of LOC
StartXRelease sort is selected and startconditions for the
mode and direction are o.k.

32 Field- bool retain no- Field Start Release Y is true in case of LOC
StartYRelease sort is selected and startconditions for the
mode and directions are o.k.

33 SigErr bool retain no- Signal Error summing OrdAO and Actu-
sort alValue Sig Error Status

34 FirstOrMax- string[32] retain no- '' Tag Name of the IO Device with the first or
AETag sort highest Alarm or Event causing an action
on the Motor, Group or Valve

35 FirstOrMax- dint retain no- 0 Indication treatment of the first or highest


AEIndTr sort Alarm or Event causing an action accroding
to Minerals Library Alarm Indication Stand-
ards

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 246/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

36 LastTripTxt string[40] retain Interlock Description or PCC AETag of the


Last Trip

37 LastTrip date_and_time retain Time of the Last Trip in System Time

10.2.4. Behavior with SPExtRef LCC


The Actuator supports LCC for the SPExt Mode external Reference, connected via SPExtRef
Parameter. Please refer to the 03 Loop Objects Manual for a description of this Datatype.

10.2.4.1. Backtracking

Set if the Actuator is not in SPExt Mode, is Interlocked or Tripped in both Directions.

10.2.4.2. Min Reached / Max Reached

Set when the Actuator internal configured Limits are reached, or when the Actuator is Inter-
locked or Tripped in one Direction only. The OrdAO Output Parameter Value will always be
kept inside the Limits independent of the Backtracking Support of the Block connected via
LCC.

10.2.4.3. Communication Error

In case SPExtRef is connected from a Communication Variable and the Communication is


lost, the Actuator changes to and stays in SPInt Mode.

10.2.5. Project Constants


Name Default Value Data Type

1 cBMI.Actuator.DevTr dint 2

2 cBMI.Actuator.DirX_txt string 'Position X'

3 cBMI.Actuator.DirY_txt string 'Position Y'

4 cBMI.Actuator.DisabledIntMaxIndTr dint 13

5 cBMI.Actuator.DisableIAInLoc bool true

6 cBMI.Actuator.DisableIBInLoc bool true

7 cBMI.Actuator.DisableIBInMaint bool true

8 cBMI.Actuator.DisableICInMaint bool false

9 cBMI.Actuator.EnALFieldMode bool true

10 cBMI.Actuator.EnCen bool true

11 cBMI.Actuator.EnFPLStopInAllModes bool true

12 cBMI.Actuator.EnLoc bool true

13 cBMI.Actuator.EnMaint bool true

14 cBMI.Actuator.EnMaintInCenSeq bool false

15 cBMI.Actuator.EnSeq bool true

16 cBMI.Actuator.EnSPExt bool true

17 cBMI.Actuator.EnSPInt bool true

18 cBMI.Actuator.FBErrorMode dint 0

19 cBMI.Actuator.FBPosX_txt string 'Position Err X'

20 cBMI.Actuator.FBPosY_txt string 'Position Err Y'

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 247/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

21 cBMI.Actuator.ForcedX_txt string 'Forced Dir X'

22 cBMI.Actuator.ForcedY_txt string 'Forced Dir Y'

23 cBMI.Actuator.IOS4StopMotor bool true

24 cBMI.Actuator.IOS_txt string 'I/O Error'

25 cBMI.Actuator.KeepMaintInCenSeq bool false

26 cBMI.Actuator.LocalStop_txt string 'Local Stop'

27 cBMI.Actuator.M1_txt string 'Not Available'

28 cBMI.Actuator.M1NormalValue bool true

29 cBMI.Actuator.ME_txt string 'Ctrl Voltage Trip'

30 cBMI.Actuator.MinBalancingTime time 10s

31 cBMI.Actuator.ModeTr bool true

32 cBMI.Actuator.StatusTr bool true

33 cBMI.Actuator.TorqueX_txt string 'Torque Err X'

34 cBMI.Actuator.TorqueY_txt string 'Torque Err Y'

35 cBMI.Actuator.Warning_txt string 'Summary Warning'

36 cBMI.Actuator.XYErr_txt string 'Limit Switch Err'

10.3. Operation
10.3.1. Graphic elements
Graphic Element Description Example

VCO_ActuatorConsumer Object status, control point, mode and alarm information


as symbol.

VCO_ActuatorCtrl Displays object control information. Allows direct entry of


set-point.

VCO_ActuatorFBTxt Limit switch feedback information as text.

For more information see chapter 2.3 Operation

10.3.2. Faceplate
The following aspect view buttons are available on Actuator Faceplates

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 248/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

For a description of the PCC Viewer refer Viewer Detail Description

The following command buttons are available on Actuator Faceplates

Icon Description Icon Description

Open – set Setpoint Reference to Maxi- Acknowledge alarm


mum Value

Close – set Setpoint Reference to Mini- Change control point to sequence:


mum Value The object is controlled automatically
from the application program in the controller

Set Internal Setpoint Mode - Setpoint Change control point to central:


Reference from FPL The object is controlled manually
from the Faceplate with the buttons

Set External Setpoint Mode – Setpoint Change control point to local


Reference from Application The object is controlled locally in the field
via a local panel with push buttons.
Depending on configuration some interlock
categories are not active in Local.

Stop – re-set Setpoint Reference to cur- Increase Setpoint


rent MV Value

Decrease Setpoint

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 249/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.2.1. Default View

Aspect View Buttons

Indication that any in-


terlock is currently
blocked
Current POC Se-
quence and Mode
SPExt (External Set-
point Ref) Stop: set SP to current
MV Value (and SPInt)

Access Extended View


Access Normal View (Identification Run)
(Detail Info, Limits)

Figure 100 - Actuator Default View

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 250/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.2.2. Normal View

Figure 101 - Actuator Normal View

The faceplate first extended view gives more detailed information about the Actuator, such
as:

Tab Description

Interlock Interlock indication and interlock blocking

PCC Interlock PCC interlock indication

Alarm Alarm indication and alarm blocking

Trend Actual position, position setpoint and analog output as on-line trend

Group Corresponding Drive Group issues

SPLimits Setpoint limit settings

Limits Deviation and Speed limit settings

Maintenance Maintenance issues

IOStatus Substatus for DP, PA, FF Field Devices and LCC connected to Actual Position, Output and
SPExtRef

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 251/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.2.3. Interlock

Figure 102 - Actuator Interlocks

Reference Table, Interlocks (described behavior can be changed by project constants)

Type of interlock Description

ICX Safety interlock for direction 1(X) Stops the Actuator and prevents Setpoint changes in
Active in all POC/modes. Direction 1(X) as long as the interlock is on.

ICY Safety interlock to direction 2(Y) Stops the Actuator and prevents Setpoint changes in
Active in all POC/modes. Direction 2(Y) as long as the interlock is on.

IB Process interlock Stops the Actuator and prevents Setpoint changes as


Not active in POC Local long as the interlock is on.

IAX Combined Auto-start and Chain interlock Stops the Actuator and prevents Setpoint changes in
for direction 1(X). Direction 1(X) as long as the interlock is on.
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

IAY Combined Auto-start and Chain interlock Stops the Actuator and prevents Setpoint changes in
for direction 2(Y). Direction 2(Y) as long as the interlock is on.
Not active in POC Local Not included in Group ReadyForStart signal.

FrcX Forced direction 1(X) The drive is forced from the application to run in direc-
tion 1(X), disregarding any interlock and alarm.

FrcY Forced direction 2(Y) The drive is forced from the application to run in direc-
tion 2(Y), disregarding any interlock and alarm

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.

All interlocks are low active. When the interlock signal is “false” the interlock is active.

Interlocks can be configured to be presented on the Tag, instead of the Symbol of the object.

10.3.2.4. Alarms

There is a build in Alarm indication on the Extended Faceplate Alarm tab.

Following Alarms can be indicated:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 252/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

– IOS Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific motor (no alarm
generated)

– ME Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm generated).Inhibits


the M1 and LCB alarms below.

Motorized Valve/Damper incorporates the following 7 alarms:

– M1 MCC supervision e.g. overload

– LCB Local operation STOP alarm (when required)

– FBX Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Position X

– FBY Supervision of “functional backsignal” FeedBack Position Y

– XY Limit switch discrepancy supervision

– TorqueX Torque switch direction X supervision

– TorqueY Torque switch direction Y supervision

– DevH, DevL Position deviation from Setpoint supervision

– Speed Minimum Speed Limit

Additionally, Actuator can indicate the following Warning (does not trip the motor):

– General Warning : User Defined Warning

Signal input level is 1 for normal status M1/M2 signal input level can be changed to 0 for nor-
mal status by project constants.

In total, 2 AlarmCond Blocks are used:

– one for M1, LCB, FBX and FBY, XY, TorqueX and TorqueY

– one for Deviation, Speed Alarm

First incoming (within the same cycle the highest prio) input will be freezed for indication
and alarm.

All alarms have individual descriptive text string as parameter in the control module.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 253/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Figure 103 - Actuator Alarms

Reference Table, Alarms

Alarm Type of alarm Description

IOS Input/Output error Indication of I/O sub-system fault used by this specific mo-
tor (no alarm generated). Forces the actuator to Balancing
Mode and prevents Setpoint changes.

ME Main control voltage Indication of main control voltage circuit fault (no alarm
generated). Inhibits the M1, LCB alarms below. Forces the
actuator to Balancing Mode and prevents Setpoint
changes.

M1 MCC interface signal 1 Forces the actuator to Balancing Mode and prevents Set-
Default alarm text is “Not Available” point changes as long as the alarm is on.

LCB Local Stop A local stop from the local control box was performed by
the operator. Local stop can always be done independent
from the POC/mode. The Setpoint is set to the current Po-
sition (MV).

FBX Feedback position direction 1(X) The position 1/X was not reached within the configured
Max FB Time

FBY Feedback motor running in direc- The position 2/Y was not reached within the configured
tion 2(Y) Max FB Time

XY Position feedback error X and Y position feedback signals are present at the same
time, prevents Setpoint changes.

TrqX Torque switch error to direction X Prevents Setpoint changes in direction X as long as the
alarm is on (Hardware I/O signal).

TrqY Torque switch error to direction Y Prevents Setpoint changes in direction Y as long as the
alarm is on (Hardware I/O signal).

DevH Deviation High (Positive) Indicates that the Position of the Actuator is higher than
the Setpoint

DevL Deviation Low (Negative) Indicates that the Position of the Actuator is lower than the
Setpoint

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 254/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Speed Speed lower than Minimum Speed The Actuator Position is changing slower than the config-
Limit ured Min Speed Limit (%/s)

Description

B Indication that the corresponding interlock has been blocked / Overridden. Yellow means that the
interlock is blocked (disabled). When it is activated a yellow `B` is indicated next to the graphic ele-
ment and on the Base Control.

All alarms are low active. When the alarm signal is “false” the alarm is active.

All alarms are shown on Actuator graphic Element directly or on the ActuatorTag depending
on configuration.

10.3.2.5. Trend

On-Line trend with actual position, position setpoint and analog output in case of analog
controlled actuator

Moving over the trend area a cursor will appear, showing traces’ value and record time

Show/Hide Trace
MV: Actual Position
Out: Analog Output
SP: Position Setpoint

Record Time

Show/Hide Grid

Figure 104 - Actuator Trends

10.3.2.6. Group

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 255/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Link to the corresponding Drive Group

This Actuator will reach Position X with


step number 60 in the Drive Group with
no delay and only if pre-selection P2 or
P3 is selected

This Actuator will reach Position Y with


step number 50 in the Drive Group with
no delay and only if pre-selection P1 is
selected

Figure 105 - Actuator Group

Reference Table, Group

Step Description Delay Preselection

Pos X1 1st sequential position order of the actuator 1st position de- Preselection Condition
to direction 1(X) within the Drive Group lay of the actua- e.g P2 | P3 = P2 or P3
tor to direction
1(X)

Pos X2 2nd sequential position order of the actua- 2nd position de- n.a
tor to direction 1(X) within the Drive Group. lay of the actua-
X2 is only executed on group stopping tor to direction
1(X)

Pos Y1 1st sequential position order of the actuator 1st position de- Preselection Condition
to direction 2(Y) within the Drive Group lay of the actua- e.g P1
tor to direction
2(Y)

Pos Y2 2nd sequential position order of the actua- 2nd position de- n.a.
tor to direction 2(Y) within the Drive Group. lay of the actua-
Y2 is only executed on group stopping tor to direction 2
(Y)

Auto Step number in which the actuator will be Time delay to set Preselection Condition
set to Auto Mode the actuator to e.g P2 & P1 | P3 & ! P1
Auto Mode (P2 and P1) or (P3 and
not P1)

Manual Step number in which the actuator will be Time delay to set n.a.
set to Manual Mode the actuator to
Manual Mode

No of Steps Max number of steps in the Drive Group n.a. n.a.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 256/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

When an actuator is not a member of a Group, the Steps are all “0”

10.3.2.7. SP Limits

Settings related to the Setpoint (SP) of the Actuator.

Figure 106 - Actuator SP Limits

Reference Table, SP Limits

SP Limits Description

Setpoint H Initial position set point High limit

Setpoint L Initial position set point Low limit

Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Auto Calculation sets the Stepsize to a multiple of 10 times 1 or 5 dependent
Step on the Range of the Setpoint

Inc/Dec Step If “Enable Auto Calc for Inc/Dec Step” is not set, the Stepsize used for the
Inc/Dec Buttons and the Direct Entry Window can be set

Enable relative Limits for En- If set, the Max Increase / Decrease Values are enforced
try Window

Max Increase The Direct Entry Window’s high limit is set to the current Value plus the Value
given here

Max Decrease The Direct Entry Window’s low limit is set to the current Value minus the
Value given here

SP Tracking External If set, the Internal Setpoint Reference follows the External Setpoint while in
SPExt Mode

SP Tracking Balancing Ref If set, the Internal Setpoint Reference follows the Balancing Reference while
in Balancing Mode
When setpoint limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consideration that
these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart / reset is per-
formed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 257/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding Actuator control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

10.3.2.8. Maintenance

Limit Switch Feed-


back is overwritten-
simulated with MV

Message and
Date/Time of last
Trip

Figure 107 - Actuator Maintenance

“Out of Service”, “Allow Alarm During Simulation” and the “Maintenance” Checkbox as well as
the “Simulate FB X Input” and “Simulate FB Y Input” Buttons are only accessible when you are
logged on as a System Engineer.

Reference Table, Maintenance

Maintenance Description

Out of Service When this box is checked the valve/damper stopped and put out of service and is not
taken into account anymore by the corresponding Drive Group.

Allow Alarm during Alarming during simulation can be enabled for testing the simulated interface signals
Simulation of an individual actuator while the rest of the group remains in simulation

Maintenance Mode Set the Actuator to Maintenance Sub-Mode. This Checkbox is only available if the Pro-
ject is configured to allow Maintenance Mode

Simulate FB X Input X Limit Switch Value is blocked and simulated with the MV Value

Simulate FB Y Input Y Limit Switch Value is blocked and simulated with the MV Value

Last Trip Reason The Reason of the Last Trip contains the Alarm, Interlock or PCC Text that was active
at the time of the last Trip

Last Trip Time Date and Time the Actuator has tripped last

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 258/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.2.9. Extended View

Figure 108 - Actuator Extended View

Reference Table, Parameters

Entry Field Description

Actual X Pos MV Value at Open Position, for FB Simulation and correction of MV Value Indication (scale
to 100%)

Actual Y Pos MV Value at Close Position, for FB Simulation and correction of MV Value Indication
(scale to 0%)

Min Speed Limit Minimum Change Rate of MV while the Actuator is not at the Position (outside Dead-
band) used for Speed Limit Alarm

Max FB Time Maximum Time needed for travelling between Open and Close Position, for Position not
reached Alarm

Last Ident Run Detected Values for the Parameters during the Last Identification Run of the Actuator
(Column)

Start Ident Start Identification Run, the Actuator will fully open and close to detect the actual physi-
cal conditions and determine the Parameter Settings

Apply Changes Copy “Last Ident Run” Values onto the Parameter Settings

Dead Band Dead Band of the Actuator, the Range where MV is defined to have reached the Setpoint.
Used for Identification Run and Speed Limit Calculation.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 259/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

FBX Sim Delay Time Delay until Position Open is simulated when MV is greater or equal to Actual X Pos

FBY Sim Delay Time Delay until Position Close is simulated when MV is lower or equal to Actual Y Pos

IOStatus

Substatus for Foundation Fieldbus, S800 Field Devices and Status of the External Setpoint
Reference (if LCC is used)

Figure 109 - Actuator IOStatus

10.3.2.10. Dev Limits

Settings for the Deviation and minimum Speed Limits

Figure 110 - Actuator Dev Limits

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 260/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

Reference Table, Limits

Limits Description

Dev H Deviation high limit (SP lower than MV)

Dev L Deviation low limit (SP higher than MV)

Dev Hyst Deviation hysteresis

Dev Delay Deviation alarm time delay

Speed Low Limit Minimum Speed Alarm Limit

Speed Meas. Interval Measurement Interval (Time) for Speed. This should be set higher than two times
the cycle time to give usable Speed measurement values.

Speed Dead Band Difference between SP and MV required for Speed Measurement. This must be set
higher than the Dead Band on the external Control Unit to enable the measurement
only while the Actuator is moving.

Speed Alarm Delay Time Delay for Min Speed Alarm.


When Deviation / Speed Limits are changed from the faceplate, you must take into consider-
ation that these values will be overwritten again with the initial values when a cold restart /
reset is performed and the coldretain files are not available for the corresponding controller.

To avoid this, you need to update the initial values for the corresponding Actuator control
module instance with Control Builder, after changing the Values from the Faceplate.

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 261/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.3. Faceplate Permissions

Figure 111 - Actuator Faceplate Permissions

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 262/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO N S U M E R O B J EC TS

10.3.4. Alarm & Event List


For general information about Alarm & Event list, please, consult chapter 2.4Alarm & Event list
.

10.3.4.1. Object Status and Mode

Object status and modes are presented on the event list. Whenever the object changes its
status or mode the complete information of the object at the time of the change is logged in
the event list. For the MOT1 object the following message structure applies:
[POC] + [MODE] + [STATUS] + [STOP REASON] + Blk: + [BLOCK LIST]

[POC] Description

Seq Point of Control Sequence (from Group or Application)

Cen Point of Control Central (from Faceplate)

Loc Point of Control Local (from Field / Local Control Box)

Out Actuator is Out of Service

[MODE] Description

SPInt Internal Setpoint Mode

SPExt External Setpoint Mode

Mtc Maintenance Mode

Bal Balancing (Signal Error or Trip Condition)

[STATUS] Description

IntPos Actuator is in Intermediate Position

RunX Actuator is started to Position X

RunY Actuator is started to Position Y

PosX Actuator is at Position X / Open

PosY Actuator is at Position Y / Closed

[STOP REASON] Description

QSP Stopped from Quick Stop command from the group

SSP Stopped from seq command from the group or from IO.In.SeqStop

CSP Stopped from the faceplate

FSP Stopped from local / field. Command from local button

PSP Stopped from process panel. Command from panel

IOS Stopped due to a failure in IOStatus connections

ME Stopped due to ME alarm

SQX Stopped due to Sequence Interlock from the Group

IC Stopped due to IC interlock

IB1 Stopped due to IB1 interlock

IB2 Stopped due to IB2 interlock

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 263/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

IB3 Stopped due to IB3 interlock

IB4 Stopped due to IB4 interlock

IA Stopped due to IA interlock

PD Stopped due to Previous Drive

PCC-IC Stopped due to IC interlock via PCC

PCC-IB Stopped due to IB interlock via PCC

PCC-IA Stopped due to IA interlock via PCC

PCC-PD Stopped due to PD interlock via PCC

[BLOCK LIST] Description

- No blockings active

IB IB interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAX IAX interlock is blocked in the faceplate

IAY IAY interlock is blocked in the faceplate

PosX Position X is simulated

PosY Position Y is simluated

10.3.4.2. Alarm Messages

For all alarm messages basically the structure of the message depends on the Alarm text
only, defined in the control module parameters. For Actuator the following messages are
available to modify:

Alarm Parameter in CM

M1 M1Txt

Local Close LcbStopTxt

Open and Close feedback at same time OpnClsErrTxt

Feedback open alarm FBOpnTxt

Feedback close alarm FBClsTxt

These text parameters can be changed in the control module from Control Builder

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 264/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

10.4. Application Example


10.4.1. Control Valve closed loop control
This Example shows a Control Valve (Actuator) to control the Ethylene Glycol Flow 731FI102 in
a given ratio of the Potable Water Flow 731FI101. The PID Controller (PIDAdvCtrl) operated in
external mode (E1A) is controlling the Control Valve position to achieve the required additive
flow. The quantity of additive is given as Ratio of the Potable Water Flow (RatioCtrl Gain) set
by Operator.

RealIO_To_LCC block is used for Flow real analog value to be connected to RatioCtrl input.
The RatioCtrl GainFactor = “0.01” defines that the Gain is given in Percentage (0-100%).

Ratio Control, Control Valve PID and Control Valve are connected via Loop Control Connection
(LCC).

Figure 112 - Control Valve closed loop control

If Control Valve (Actuator) is not in SPExt Mode, the PIDAdvCtrl OUT value tracks the Valve
Setpoint (Backtracking). This state is shown on the Faceplates as well, in case of Backtrack-
ing the PIDAdvCtrl link “OUT” to Valve is colored and a yellow bar is visible above the SPExt
Mode button in the Actuator. Min/Max reached state is also indicated if the PIDAdvCtrl or Ra-
tioCtrl ouput is not in the range of the Setpoint limits. Navigation is possible in both direc-
tions via links on the Faceplates, see the following figure:

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 265/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 266/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt
M I NE R A L S L IB R A R Y CO NS U M E R O B J EC TS

11. Revisions
Rev. Page (P) Description Date Dept./Init.
Chapt. (C)

A All Initial draft 2018-01-31/AT

B All Update for VCO MinLib Release 2020-01-20/NC

C All Update for VCO MinLib 6.1/2 2021-11-11/JM

STATUS SECURITY LEVEL DOCUMENT ID. REV. LANG. PAGE

Approved Public 3BHS161557-612 C en 267/267


We reserve all rights in this document and the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
© Copyright 2020 ABB Switzerland Lt

You might also like